JP2019088925A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing amusement of games.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 is provided with presentation performance means (a main side MPU 62 and a sound light side MPU 92) for performing presentations. When special information, which relates to a second game round to be performed after a first game round, satisfies a prescribed condition, the presentation performance means reproduce, in the second game round, at least a part of a presentation performed in the first game round.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed in accordance with various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, reach effects executed with low probability and effects executed with low frequency such as effects executed only when the jackpot lottery is won. Such a low frequency of rendition may be desired to be reproduced for the purpose of appreciation after being performed once. Conventionally, in order to respond to such a demand of a player, a gaming machine has been known which executes an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a reproduction effect) for reproducing an effect that has been performed once (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Form]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
In the case where the special information related to the second game run to be executed later than the first game run satisfies the predetermined condition,
A game machine characterized by reproducing at least a part of an effect executed in the first game time in the second game time.

  According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view explaining contents of various counters. It is explanatory drawing shown about the success / failure table memorize | stored in the success / failure table memory | storage area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of suggestion production, specific end production, and specific start production. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings. It is a flowchart which shows the prior determination process. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of change time. It is a flow chart which shows game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flow chart which shows condition judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of an end period end. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electronic switch opening and closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows pending command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flow chart which shows opening production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows ending production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart explaining the processing which the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing a mode of a display of a symbol display device at the time of performing a suggestion effect in a preceding game time. It is a time chart which shows the processing which the pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the processing which the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment performs. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of setting processing of an effect classification. It is an explanatory view showing object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A. It is explanatory drawing which shows an arrangement | positioning * timing setting table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice effect production in which a plurality of objects are combined. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an effect classification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the setting process of the effect classification in 6th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for A. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for B. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for BC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set up. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for ABC. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of an effect classification in a 6th embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a sequel effect to be executed as a reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for advance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D. FIG.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Outline of processing by gaming machine A4. Various processes executed in main controller:
A5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment (an example of setting process of effect type):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of setting process of effect type):
G. Modification:
H. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at each game play, jackpot win, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launch by the game ball launch mechanism by pressing operation by the player, and rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided to detect the amount of movement operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanisms are provided on the back of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function to control the main control of the game and a function to monitor the power supply. The main control substrate is accommodated in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control to pay out the winning balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shot control device 80 plays the game ball so as to launch a game ball whose strength corresponds to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Control the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 54, slope connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and gently sloping so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rails 55 having the above, the case rails 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rails 55, and the supply of gaming balls from the case rails 56 receive a predetermined number of gaming balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the dispensing device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided to the induction rail 31 and released to the top of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As illustrated, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 are both open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction such that the first starting opening 33 is above the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33, three gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the motorized accessory 34a is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not win the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the motorized role thing 34a is in the open state, the gaming ball can win a prize in the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 34, four game balls are paid out as winning balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won prizes in various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. When the gaming ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the gaming ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) using the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. It is possible to win a prize at the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control unit 60, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state where the gaming ball can win. In the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 shifts as a result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 when the big hit is won, and the open / close door 36b is opened. In this mode, the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the variable winning device 36 to the big winning opening 36a is possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, also when the jackpot is won, it shifts to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The first result display unit 37a performs variable display or display as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment indicator to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second result display unit 37b performs variable display or display as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the second start port 34 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d formed of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the first starting opening 33 are held. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. Further, in the present embodiment, a maximum of four gaming balls having won the second starting opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a light emitting display by a segment display or an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing a lottery and a lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game which continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game cycle is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode to be shifted when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory view showing a symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown to Fig.4 (a), the symbol display apparatus 41 is fluctuated and displayed the symbol which shows 1-8 of a number. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG.4 (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Here, the gaming round is a unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 to the player It is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information every game time. When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment acquires special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the first result display unit 37a or the second result per one game cycle. After the segment display is variably displayed on any one of the display units 37b, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires the special information based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, it is determined in the symbol display device 41 every one game cycle. After the symbol row is variably displayed, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Also, the time required for one game is also referred to as unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by the fluctuation time which is the time from when the fluctuation display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of the stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is connected with multiple detection sensors. The main MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game balls flowing down the game area PA during the game have won the respective winning openings. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winnings on the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and executes an electric combination opening lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start opening 34 , And the main display unit 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34 b such that the electric combination 34 a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control of.

  Further, on the transmission side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the result of the winning determination. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 of main control board 61 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of ten gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of winning, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning on the second starting opening 34 is specified, the payout of one gaming ball is dealt. A prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, on the basis of various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach occurrence, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the notice effect performed in each game time, etc. are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time which the combination of the symbol is stop-displaying is constant. Therefore, the unit game time which is the time required for one game time is uniquely determined by determining the change time. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to determine the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. A reach random number counter C3 is used for a reach lottery whether or not to generate a reach when changing out a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, when determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at a short time interval, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is configured of a first pending area Ra, a second pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the gaming ball wins sequentially to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are chronologically stored in the holding information storage area 64b. Is stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 33, and the gaming ball in the second starting opening 34 Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the player wins a prize. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table in the yes / no table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as a lottery mode of the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a yes / no table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a yes / no table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, under the gaming state in which the win / fail table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is 20. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and the holding information when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 It is stored in the second reserve area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (3) of the motorized handpiece 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the opening and closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning on the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b is 10 It can be set to continue until it reaches one. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above-mentioned specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the open time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the game ball may be set to be awarded.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the open / close door 36b, the open limit time for one open, and the open limit number for one open are winnings on the variable winning device 36 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode. The open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional as long as the occurrence frequency of is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the (2) opening and closing execution mode ends, a probability change lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a high probability use failure table as a success or failure table A normal lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery can be set using a low probability success or failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, in the case of performing the jackpot lottery using the high probability success or failure table, the jackpot is won in comparison to the case of performing the big hit lottery using the low probability success or failure table. The probability of doing is high.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues in the same manner to the gaming area PA In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination opening lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode In the low frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state may be set more frequently when the electronic winning combination is won, and one open time may be set longer. In the high frequency support mode, when the opening is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , May be set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary gaming state which assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first start port 33 is higher than that of the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning to the second start port 34 is higher than the first start port 33. The probability of winning will increase. In the case of a high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the ball much because a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed when a winning on the second starting opening 34 occurs. Can.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time rather than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and, for example, The probability of winning the winning combination may be increased. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured in which the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed, the low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a short securing time may be easily selected or the average securing time may be shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured upon the execution of the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is shortened. Even if the average time of securing time is shortened and the probability of winning is increased, any one or any combination of conditions is applied to enhance the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode. Good.

  As described above, it is possible to set multiple types of jackpots for the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the plurality of jackpot types. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R as a jackpot type based on the first start aperture 33 Jackpot, 8R Normal Jackpot is set.

  The mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the hit / off lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, the opening / closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  The mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, the success or failure lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is the low probability mode, and the opening and closing execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 13" corresponds to 16R probability variation big hits, and "14 to 27" are 8R normal big hits “28 to 33” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot, and “34 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next highest for the 8R probability variation jackpot, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second start-up port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a jackpot type based on the second start-up port 34, 16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and "28 to 39" is the 8R probability variation jackpot It corresponds to That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, all the jackpots based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 become probability variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, and the second This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

  As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot types of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting the winning of the second starting opening 34 among the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 to occur. If the result is out in the success or failure lottery, there is no transition to the open / close execution mode, and no change in the success or failure lottery mode or the support mode occurs.

  As described above, the MPU 62 carries out a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop display on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2. Determine the display mode. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 34 The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reserve area Ra or the second reserve area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 It is checked against the table to determine whether to generate a reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4 (b), first, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation in which the said reach line is formed, it becomes reach by performing the change display of a symbol in symbol row Z2. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the fluctuation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the fluctuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. The motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether to control the motorized jack 34a in the open state using the stored value of the motorized jack release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

  The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first hold area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first starting port 33, and the second hold area Rb The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in corresponds to the hold information pertaining to the second start port 34, and these hold information is the special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Outline of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case a1 and the case a2 as examples.

  FIG. 9A is a case a1 and wins a jackpot lottery in the first game round (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "big hit"), and the jackpot in the second game round executed after the first game round The drawing shows the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery is lost. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game round immediately before the first game round is out, and there is no other game round between the first game round and the second game round Give an explanation. In addition, other game times may be present between the first game times and the second game times. The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game play between the first game play and the second game play will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. The advance notice effect is an effect executed immediately before or after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, and is an effect for suggesting to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect to be executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests the expectation to the player to win the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The special gaming state is a state in which a player is given a privilege. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting of the open / close execution mode as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the open / close execution mode, a predetermined effect for the open / close execution mode is executed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect. As shown to Fig.9 (a), in this description, the period for performing an ending production is called an ending period.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect in the ending period. The suggestive effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the already performed effect. In the present embodiment, the suggestive effect is an effect of content that suggests reproducing the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from among a plurality of types in the first gaming round. Also, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the special game state.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory view showing an example of a suggested effect, a specific end effect, and a specific start effect described later. FIG. 10 (a) shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10 (b) shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10 (c) shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect that suggests that the female character reproduces the effect performed in the first game round, that is, the advance effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggested effect in the ending period, as the special game state reproduction effect, the advance effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect performed in the first game cycle are performed. Reproduce and execute. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced, but the notice effect, the reach effect or the result performed in the first game time Only part of the notification effect may be reproduced. For example, when executing notice production, reach production and result announcement production as special gaming state reproduction production, reach production and result announcement production are preferentially reproduced and part or all of the notice production is omitted and executed. It is also good. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are usually executed frequently at normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce reach effects and result notice effects (big hit notices) that are only performed at the time of reach or jackpot. The special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effect that strongly desires the reproduction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the variable display and stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of executing the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round It is partly different from the contents of the symbol.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific end effect. As illustrated, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect of the content that the female character suggests that the special gaming state reproduction effect has ended.

  Description is returned to FIG. 9 (a). The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game run is executed. The jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time is out. The pachinko machine 10 executes, in the second gaming session, a normal advance notice effect (also referred to as a normal notice effect) for anticipating the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notice effect (off notice). Heretofore, the case a1 has been described.

  Next, case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery is also hit in the second game round as Case a2. .

  As shown in FIG. 9 (b), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game round. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting of the open / close execution mode as the opening effect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes an open / close execution mode in which the open / close door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the pachinko machine 10 executes an ending effect in the ending period.

  In the case a2, unlike the case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestion effect in the ending period. The contents of the suggested effect are the same as the contents of the suggested effect performed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. That is, the ending period in the case a2 is shorter than the ending period in the case a1.

  The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state with the end of the suggestion effect. After that, the second game run is executed. In the case a2, a jackpot lottery is won also in the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game repetition reproduction effect as an effect in the second game play. The game repetition effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the effect already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, the effect executed in the first game play is reproduced as the game play effect. That is, the notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect (big hit notice) executed in the first gaming round are executed. In this case, the notification effect (big hit notification) as a result has a function as a part of the game repetition effect and also has a function as a result notification about the jackpot lottery of the second game play. Then, with the end of the game repetition effect, the second game time is ended.

  In addition, although it demonstrates using a flowchart later, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the game time which won the big hit lottery is constant. That is, in the case of case a2, since both the first game time and the second game time are game times in which the big hit lottery is won, the fluctuation time of the first game time and the fluctuation of the second game time The time is the same. Therefore, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect performed in the first gaming round can be executed as a game repetition reproduction effect in the second gaming round.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times for winning the big hit lottery is controlled to be constant, but the variation time of the game times for winning the big hit lottery is set by using random numbers. The variation times of the game times at the time of the jackpot may be different each time. In this case, when the second game time is longer than the first game time, when the second game time starts, the time difference between the variation times of the second game time and the first game time It is also possible to use (remaining time) to perform a suggested effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects for each length of the surplus time, it is possible to execute the suggestive effects at the start of the second game cycle even if the surplus time is different each time. The suggestion effect performed using the surplus time will be executed after the suggestion effect performed in the special gaming state after the first game cycle. Therefore, the content of the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time is set so that the suggestion effect to be executed in the special gaming state and the suggestion effect to be executed using the surplus time have contents having continuity. It is also good. By doing this, even when the second game play is longer than the first game play, the game play effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the second game play.

  In addition, when the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only a part of the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game effect. It may be For example, when executing advance notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect as game turn reproduction effect, reach effect and result notice effect are preferentially reproduced, and part or all of the notice effect is omitted to perform game turn reproduction effect May be performed. By omitting some or all of the notice effects that are usually executed frequently at normal times, the player can preferentially reproduce reach effects and result notice effects (big hit notices) that are only performed at the time of reach or jackpot. It is possible to preferentially reproduce an effect that strongly desires to be reproduced.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, after the end of the second game, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect of the special game state thereafter, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a winning and the game repetition effect is executed in the second game time.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game session, and the special game state (opened and closed due to the jackpot in the second game session It is an effect that suggests that the execution mode is started. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode and the ending effect. In this case, the effect and the ending effect (normal ending effect) performed in the opening and closing execution mode are effects performed at the time of a normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is ended.

  The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using two cases, case a1 and case a2. As described in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game round is out, the advance notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect performed after the suggestion effect are performed in the first game round It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces an effect, and the player also recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces an effect already performed. On the other hand, as in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round is won, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notice effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect It is executed as an effect that reproduces the effect, but is actually a game repetition effect that is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 has been previously appreciated, the player executes the game reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time, similar to case a1. It is difficult to predict that the game has been won in the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run, while recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won by the result notification staging after the preliminary announcement effect and the reach presentation are executed in the second gaming round, Is not the reproduction of the effect performed in the first game round, but the first game play, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed in the second game time for the first time at that time, and the second game Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the times. Thus, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game repetition reproduction effect in the case a2, not only the unexpectedness is given to the game, but also at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the effect to be played. In addition, by making the second gaming round in the case a2 an expansion that the player does not expect, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested to reproduce the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round despite the jackpot lottery in the second game round being won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to further predict that the jackpot lottery according to the second gaming round has been won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further imparted to the game.

  In addition, as in case a2, when the notice effect, reach effect and result notification effect executed in the first game cycle are reproduced as it is and executed in the second game cycle, the result notification effect in the second game cycle is executed. Even if it is played, the player may not notice that he has won the jackpot lottery in the second game run, but after the end of the second game run, the specific start effect is executed in the special game state. When the specific start effect is executed, the player can be made to recognize that the jackpot lottery in the second gaming round has been won.

A4. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the process shown in the case a1 and the case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The process executed in main controller 60 will be described first, and then the process executed in audio light emission control device 90 and display control device 100 will be described.

  The main MPU 62 of the main control unit 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing in order to advance the game of each game play. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the motorized combination release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, the winning opening process for the starting opening accompanying the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a winning process for through is accompanied by the winning of the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize process for starting opening>
Next, winning processing for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11: S104).

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start hole 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33. In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to signal that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first pending area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not won the first starting opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 2 Determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the start port 34.

  In step S205, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the gaming ball has not won the second starting opening 34 (S205: NO), the winning processing for the main starting opening is ended.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 as a signal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, the start pending count RbN (hereinafter also referred to as second start pending count RbN), which is a value stored in the pending count storage area of the second reserve area Rb, is read, and the second start pending count RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the start reservation pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). In step S209, when the start reservation number N is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S209, if the start pending count N is less than the upper limit (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, 1 is added to the start pending count N of the corresponding hold area, and then the process proceeds to step S211. And 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserve number storage area (hereinafter, referred to as the total reserve number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, each value of jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding hold area, ie, step It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings to which 1 is added in S210. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) The value is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start suspension number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S210. In addition, when the second start reservation number RbN is set as the processing target, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is The first storage area among the free storage areas of the second storage area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210, is stored. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, an earlier determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3, the hit / not decision result (lottery result) of the big hit lottery, the type of big hit, reach occurrence It is a process which performs determination of the presence or absence etc. before the said pending | holding information becomes the object of the big hit lottery by the main control unit 60. Details of the prior determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

  In step S214, a process of setting a hold command is performed. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a pending command.

  In the hold command, the hold information indicates the determination result by the prior determination processing based on the occurrence of the winning to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the holding information acquired based on the winning, the main control unit This is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm before the target of the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the command output process of the normal process described later (FIG. 15: step S502).

  Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased in the number of hold. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of the hold in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the prior determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 12: S213) of the winning process for the starting opening.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the prior determination process. As described above, in the first determination process, based on the hold information, determination results such as the determination of the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, the determination of the type of the big hit, the determination of the presence or absence of reach, etc. It is a process to be executed before becoming a target of the lottery.

  In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening in the winning opening process for starting opening (FIG. 12) is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read out from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit occurs prior to the big winning lottery by the current winning. Thus, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the hit table storage area Referring to the pass / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the big hit lottery due to the current prize is executed as a game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304 and for high probability mode As a result of referring to the success or failure table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read out this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and is stored in the storage area by winning for the current starting opening. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which has been the current distribution target is obtained based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the first start opening distribution table is referred to, If it is obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step S308, when it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot (S308: YES), the process proceeds to step S309, and the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the big hit (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311 and is stored in the storage area by winning to the current starting opening. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S312, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the reach occurrence.

  If it is determined in step S313 that reach has been generated (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314 to store reach generation information in the first determination process result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the first determination process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence (S313: NO), the first determination process is ended as it is.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The winning combination processing for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11: S105).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the through winning process. In step S401, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 or not. In step S401, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the number of bonus items reserved SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine if It should be noted that the number-of-items-reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings on the through gate 35 which has been suspended for performing the electric combination opening symbol. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bonus items held SN is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the through processing for this through is ended.

  If it is determined in step S402 that the number is less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the bonus item holding number SN (S402: YES), the process proceeds to step S403, and 1 is added to the bonus item holding number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 11) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the power storage area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through winning process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the number of bonus holdings SN is not less than the upper limit (S402: NO), that is, if the value of the number of holdings of bonus items SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit, The through winning process is ended without storing the value of the motorized product release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process previously executed is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. Also, when commands relating to effects such as variable commands, type commands, and hold commands are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S502, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, game number control processing for controlling a game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, and the second result display unit 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, a process for supporting the combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is performed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the motor-operated part 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly, the start of the command output processing of step S502). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come. If it is determined in step S508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S508: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S509 and S510. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S509, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S510, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S508 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S508: YES), the process returns to step S502, and each process from step S502 to step S507 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S502 to step 507 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 15: S505).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the game play control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the special game state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing described later, and is turned OFF when ending the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

  When it is determined in step S601 that any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special gaming state is in progress, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps The game play control process ends without executing any of them. That is, when in the special game state, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has a winning. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the special game mode is not in progress (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying variable. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display mode. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variation display flag of the variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display in progress flag is turned on when the variable display is started for one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display is ended.

  If it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display mode (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game start process of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reserve number CRN is "0" means that the reserve number for start is "0" for any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total number of held pieces CRN is "0" (S603: YES), the game play control process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, data setting processing for setting data stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S605, the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S606.

  In step S606, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the game number control process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S602 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S602: YES), the processing for game play progression in steps S607 to S609 is executed.

  In step S 607, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game number has elapsed. The fluctuation time is, as described above, a time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows are stopped, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 19) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  If it is determined in step S607 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S607: NO), the process proceeds to step S608 to execute fluctuation display processing. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit according to the current game run. After executing step S608, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S607 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S607: YES), the process proceeds to step S609 to execute fluctuation end processing. In the end process of variation, the result display unit is displayed so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 18) described later is displayed on the result display unit according to the current game round. Display control. After executing step S609, the game number control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 16: S604).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S701, it is determined whether the pending area that is the processing target for executing the data setting process is the first pending area Ra. Specifically, of the hold information stored chronologically in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6), the hold information stored first (the hold in the first area of the first hold area Ra) Information) is stored in the first hold area of the second hold area Rb (the first hold area of the second hold area Rb) among the hold information stored chronologically in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6). When it is stored in the hold area prior to the hold information), it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the first hold area Ra. On the other hand, in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 6), the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6) stores the first hold information among the hold information stored in time series. In the case where one of the hold information stored first among the hold information is stored in the hold area earlier, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the hold information can be processed in the order stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is the first pending area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first pending area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S701: NO And the data setting process for the second reserve area in steps S708 to S713.

  In step S702, after decrementing the first start pending number RaN of the first pending area Ra by one, the process proceeds to step S703, and the total pending number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first reserve area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S705.

  In step S705, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reserve area Ra is performed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is the target of the start of the current variable display. Then, it progresses to step S707.

  In step S 707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserve area subject to the current data shift corresponds to the first reserve area Ra, that is, corresponding to the first starting port 33. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S 707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S 502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. Do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the pending area to be processed is not the first pending area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the pending area to be processed is the second pending area Rb (step S701: NO), It progresses to step S708.

  In step S 708, the second start reservation number RbN of the second reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the total pending number CRN is decremented by one, and in step S710 the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S711.

  In step S711, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the second reserve area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

  In step S712, when the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S713.

  In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the reserved area which is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, corresponding to the second start port 34. A shift command including information on the presence is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held pieces based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 16: S605).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the change start process. In step S801, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag of the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether or not the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and in the present embodiment, it is turned ON at the end of the open / close execution mode relating to winning of the probability variation jackpot. After that, it is usually turned off when the jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S801 that the mode is the high probability mode (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the high probability mode for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode is not set (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, the determination of success or failure is performed with reference to the success or failure table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 7A. Determine if Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of success or failure (big hit lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big hit. In step S804, when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S804: YES), in step S805 to step S812, in order to set the processing and stop result for setting the game result in the case of a big hit Execute the process of

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806 to refer to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8A). Then, a distribution determination is made. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is either the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot Determine if it is included in

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second start port (see FIG. 8B). Perform the distribution judgment with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is either the numerical range of 16R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variation jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot Determine if it is included in After the process of step S806 or step S807 is performed. The process proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot. If it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probability variation jackpot (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the big variation is the state in which the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b displays any stop result in the current game round that will win the big variation hit It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

  In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 16R probability variation jackpot is hit, and the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON when the 8R probability variation jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  If it is determined in step S 808 that the type of jackpot distributed in step S 806 or step S 807 is not a probability variation jackpot (S 808: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step S 811. move on.

  In step S811, a stop result setting process for the normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where a normal jackpot is won. It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal flag is turned ON when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned ON when the 8R normal jackpot is hit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S804, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not jackpot winning (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813 to execute stop result setting processing for out of time. The stop result setting process for out of time ends the fluctuation display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where the disconnection result is obtained. Is a process for setting the Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for disconnection at the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, a setting process of the fluctuation time is performed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set fluctuation time which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b based on the presence or absence of the big hit and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. Processing. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

  In step S815, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, and the presence or absence of reach has occurred. And the information on the fluctuation time set in step S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the process proceeds to step S817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence And the information on the fluctuation time set in step S814. After performing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

  In step S 818, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes information of 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information of outlier results as jackpot type information.

  The fluctuation command and type command set in step S816 to step S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

  In step S819, variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is identified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, If the second result display unit flag is ON, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the variation start process is ended.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, setting processing of the fluctuation time will be described. The setting process of the fluctuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 18: S814) of the fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the fluctuation time. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run is a winning. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any flag is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, with reference to the jackpot fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game round in which the jackpot lottery is won is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S902, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not winning (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether reach is generated in the current game round. Since the main process (S905) is executed when the big hit lottery relating to the current game round is not won in the above step S902, in step S905, reach occurs among the game rounds not winning the big hit lottery It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. In addition, in specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S906, the fluctuation generation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the fluctuation generation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reaching is constant. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In step S905, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game run (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the reach non-generation change time table stored in the change time table storage area 63d is referred Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the fluctuation time ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN, and the variation time may be set shorter as the number of total reserved numbers CRN decreases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the variation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. The variation time may increase as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be set to be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-occurrence so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same as the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode A variation time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected may differ between the jackpot winning time and the outreach time. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the regular jackpot, the fluctuation time table for the outreach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete outlier may be individually set.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 15: S506).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the game state transition process. In step S1001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state, as described with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when shifting the gaming state to the open / close execution mode, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the beginning of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, and timing of variation display of symbols in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b is ended. It is determined whether the When it is determined in step S1004 that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (S1004: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that it is the timing when the variable display has ended (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result (the result of the jackpot lottery) of the current game round is switched to the open / close execution mode It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R positive change flag, the 8R positive change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this gaming state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that the game result (the result of the big hit lottery) of the current game run is determined to correspond to the transition to the open / close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006 and the high probability mode Turn off the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, an opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various timer counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds of the open / close execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1008, the process advances to step S1009 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1010 that the opening period has ended (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011, and the opening period flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1012.

  In step S1012, a round display start process for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. And based on the confirmed address information, while specifying stop result data corresponding to the said address information out of the stop result data group memorize | stored in ROM63, while specifying the content of the round count from the specified stop result data Check. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Thereby, the round display unit 39 displays the information on the round related to the output. After executing step S1012, the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013, the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R positive variation flag, 8R positive variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R positive variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed. If it is determined in step S1013 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R positive variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S1013: YES), the process proceeds to step S1014, and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the open / close door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1013 that the jackpot type flag stored in RAM 64 is the 8R positive variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S1013: NO), the process proceeds to step S1015 and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. Set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After performing step S1014 or step S1015, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1016, the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1017 to execute the special winning opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the large winning is achieved by setting the variable winning driving portion 36c to a driving state, on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Open the mouth 36a. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number is winning. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the big winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step S1017, the process proceeds to step S1018.

  In step S1018, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1018: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1018: YES), the process proceeds to step S1019, and the open / close execution mode flag is set to OFF. After executing step S1019, the process proceeds to step S1020.

  In step S1020, an end process of the round display is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

  In step S1021, a condition determination process is performed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case applies to the case a2 shown in FIG. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery in the next game turn, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, and the effects performed in the current game turn in the fluctuation time of the next game turn (notice effect, reach effect and It is determined whether or not to execute processing for reproducing the result notification effect (big hit notification). The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

  In step S1022, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In step S1023, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S502 in the normal process (FIG. 15). The sound emission control apparatus 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

  In step S1024, the ending period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the game state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1025.

  In step S1025, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1022), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in an ending time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. If it is determined in step S1025 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S1025: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

  In step S1026, the ending period flag is set to OFF. After that, the process advances to step S1027 to execute transition processing at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game play after the ending of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1027, the present gaming state transition process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1025 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S1025: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: 1017) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1103: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104 and the variable winning drive portion opens the big winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the drive state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are the high-frequency winning mode, “15000” (ie, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set to the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" in the winning counter area PC. "" May be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, an open command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The release command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has been started. By the external output process (FIG. 15: step S502), it is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 can be displayed as the special winning opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the opening of the. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are as follows: opening of the special winning opening 36a Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". Do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, where the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1110: NO), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1107: YES), or if it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the pay counter area PC is "0" In step S1110 (YES in step S1110), the process advances to step S1111 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable prize drive unit 36c is in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1113 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1113: YES), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a closing command. After that, the special winning opening opening and closing process ends.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has ended, and the normal processing In the external output process (FIG. 15: step S502) of FIG. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the contents of the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are Update to the contents corresponding to the end of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are finished, the opening of the big winning opening 36a is finished Update to the content corresponding to what you did.

<Condition determination processing>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1021) of the gaming state transition processing.

  As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case is the case a2 shown in FIG. The conditions for enabling execution of the process of case a2 are to win the jackpot lottery in the first gaming round and win the jackpot lottery in the second gaming round. This condition determination processing is executed immediately before the end of the open / close execution mode after winning a jackpot lottery in the game round, and determines whether or not the jackpot lottery will be won in the next game round.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing condition determination processing. In step S 1201, it is determined whether the hold count CRN> 0. By executing this processing, when executing the special gaming state after the first gaming round, it is confirmed whether or not there is a gaming round immediately after the special gaming state. If there is no game play, there will be no game play corresponding to the second game play that can execute the game play reproduction effect immediately after the suggested effect, and execution of the process of case a2 becomes impossible .

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the hold count CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1201 that the hold count CRN> 0 is not satisfied (S1201: NO), the present condition determination processing is ended as it is.

  At step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game play is read out. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening in the winning opening process for starting opening (FIG. 12) is read. Then, it progresses to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery relating to the next game time is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204 to refer to the low probability mode success or failure table stored in the success or failure table storage area 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205 to refer to the high probability table for high probability mode stored in the hit / not table storage area 63a. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces, in the case of case a2 (FIG. 9), the game repetition reproduction effect executed in the second game time in the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. It is a flag used to prevent execution. When it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1209.

  In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 by the external output process (FIG. 15: step S502) of the normal process. Thereafter, the condition determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or if it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In step S1207 (YES in S1207), the present condition determination process ends.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1022) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4, which is a timer for the ending time. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in the case a2 of FIG. In the case a2, only the suggested effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect performed in the first game is not reproduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the suggested effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the ending time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in the case a1 of FIG. In the case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds is secured as an ending time required for the execution of the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestion effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect overlap avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the process advances to step S1307 to set an effect overlap avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 15: step S502). After executing step S1307, the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting an ending time in the special gaming state after the second game round in the case a2 of FIG. In case a2, the normal ending effect is performed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending effect.

<Migration process at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1027) of the gaming state transition processing.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether the flag corresponding to the probable variation big hit as the big hit type flag is set to ON in the RAM 64 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R probability change flag or the 8R probability change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R positive variation flag or the 8R positive variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the high probability mode flag is set to ON, and then the process proceeds to step S1404 to set the high frequency support mode flag to ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the process proceeds to step S1407 to execute flag deletion processing. Specifically, the 16R probability change flag, the 8R probability change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are turned OFF when they are ON, and they are maintained when they are not ON. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, after setting the high frequency support mode flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the number-of-plays counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, a high frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is used as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the ending period is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 15: S507).

  FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the processing for electronic part support. In step S1501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag of the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the motorized accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the open state, and is turned off when the motorized part 34a in the second start port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether the support winning flag of the various flags storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the opening condition is won in the electric combination opening lottery whether to set the electric combination 34a to the opening condition, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1503: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S1504 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S1504: YES), the process advances to step S1505 to set the gap display, and then the electronic control support process ends. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1504 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus item holding number SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is "0" (S1506: NO), the present support routine processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S1506: YES), the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S1508, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected. If it is not the open / close execution mode in step S1507 (S1507: NO) and the high frequency support mode is in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the process proceeds to step S1509, and an electric combination open lottery is performed. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1509 is a support winning. In step S1510, when it is determined that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2 which has been set. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the motorized jack 34a has been released. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the motorized combination open lottery is not the support winning (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1512 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1512 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1512: NO), the electronic control support process ends.

  In step S1513, it is determined whether the game number counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is over. If it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1513 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1514, and the high frequency support mode flag is set to OFF. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the external output process (FIG. 15: step S502) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined in step S1518 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516 and the electric combination open lottery I do. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination release lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1517.

  In step S1517, it is determined whether the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1516 is support winning. If it is determined in step S1517 that no support win has been made (S1517: NO), the present support for electronic assembly is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1517 that support is won (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, turns on the support win flag, and sets "1" in the second round counter area RC2. , Finish the processing for this boardroom support.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S 1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T 2 is not “0” (S 1519: NO), this is the process of displaying for the electric wave support as it is displaying fluctuation of the pattern in the drawing unit 38. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

  In step S1520, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the drawing unit 38 is ended in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1521 to set the in-support flag ON and the support winning flag OFF. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is ON (S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1522 to execute electric combination open / close control processing for opening / closing control of the motorized combination 34a. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

<Electronic work opening and closing control process>
Next, the electronic combination open / close control process will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 25: S1522) of the electronic combination support process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination open / close control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the motorized jack 34a is open. Whether or not the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state is determined based on whether or not the motorized symbol drive unit 34b is in the driven state. If it is determined that the motor-operated combination 34a is open (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the motor-operated accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1602: NO), the present on-off control control process ends. That is, when the open continuation time of the motorized accessory 34a has not ended, the present opening and closing control processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process is performed to control the motorized prize 34a in the closed state. "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the open continuation time of the motorized part 34a is "0", the motorized part 34a is closed and, in this case, the second timer counter area T2 is motorized. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

  In step S1604, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S1605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1605: NO), the present electronic combination control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606, and the in-support flag is turned off. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1601 that the motorized jack 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the motorized accessory 34a. In step S1607, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the present electronic combination control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608 to execute an opening process for controlling the motorized part 34a in an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the process proceeds to step S1610 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is Do.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (S1610: YES), the process proceeds to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1609: YES), or if it is determined in step S1610 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612. "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit control processing ends.

A5. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 27 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that some components of the power supply device 85 and the like are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in a part of the area of the ROM 93, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variation display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and the like are provided. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. While the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 will be the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control apparatus and the display control apparatus will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control apparatus 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S1701, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main side MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Read sequentially according to the stored order. After executing step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702.

  In step S1702, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

  In step S1703, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S1702. After step S1703 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1704, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step S1702. After executing step S1704, the present timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing for command>
Next, command corresponding processing will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 28: S1702).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the command corresponding process will be described.

  In step S 1801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1801 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1801: YES), the process advances to step S1802 to execute hold command handling processing. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1801 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1801: NO), the process proceeds to step S1803 without executing step S1802.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1803 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1803: YES), the process proceeds to step S1804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1803 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1803: NO), the process proceeds to step S1805.

  In step S1804, an effect setting process is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop symbol, a fluctuation display pattern, and the like to be executed in the current game run are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1805 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the contents of the effect is set The opening effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1807.

  In step S1807, an open / close execution mode effect setting process is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds included in the opening command and the information on the jackpot type. After executing step S1807, the process proceeds to step S1808.

  If it is determined in step S1805 that the opening command has not been received (S1805: NO), processing proceeds to step S1808 without executing steps S1806 and S1807.

  In step S1808, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1808 that the condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809, and the sound light stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light RAM 94 Turn on the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1808 that the condition satisfaction command is not received (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810 without executing step S1809.

  In step S1810, it is determined whether a rendering overlap avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1810 that the effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1810: YES), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the sound stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 The light side effect duplication flag is turned ON. After step S 1811 is executed, the process proceeds to step S 1812. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1810 that the effect duplication avoidance command is not received (S1810: NO), the process proceeds to step S1812 without executing step S1811.

  In step S1812, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S 1812 that the ending command has been received (S 1812: YES), the process advances to step S 1813 to execute ending effect setting processing. The ending effect setting process is a process of setting the content of the ending effect in the ending period based on the information on the ending time included in the ending command received this time, and the information of ON / OFF of the sound light side condition satisfaction flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S 1813, the process proceeds to step S 1814.

  If it is determined in step S 1812 that the ending command has not been received (S 1812: NO), the process proceeds to step S 1814 without executing step S 1813.

  In step S1814, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the setting of the effect content corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the open command and the close command is performed. Further, when the rendering operation button 24 is pressed, a rendering operation command for recognizing that the rendering operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display MPU 102. After executing step S1814, the command handling process is finished.

<Hold command handling process>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 29: S1802).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process that is executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S1901, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and these pending A process is performed to enable the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1901 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33 is also referred to as the “first number of held pieces”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34 is It is also referred to as "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also referred to as "total pending number". After executing step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902.

  In step S1902, a hold display control process is performed. Specifically, the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 specified in step S1901, and the number of the suspension information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 The display mode (the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted) of the first hold display unit 37c and the second hold display unit 37d are controlled based on the above. After executing step S1902, the pending command handling process is ended.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: S1901) of the hold command handling process.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. In step S2001, it is determined whether the hold command that has been read this time has been sent based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S2001 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and Update processing of the first hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first hold count counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 in the sound-light MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold count counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command which is the current read target. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2001, when it is determined that the hold command that has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S2001: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the data has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S2003, and the process of updating the second hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second hold number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning on the second start port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update processing of the second hold count counter area, the information of the second hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the command that is the current read target. After performing step S2003, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  The reason why the processes of step S2002 and step S2003 are as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. I will not. Therefore, when the power is shut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 holds the hold information. While the sound emission control device 90 stores and holds the information, it is determined that the hold information is zero. In this case, assuming that voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold count counter area or the second hold count counter area every time it receives a hold command, main controller 60 actually stores the hold. There may be a disadvantage that the number of pending information being held and the number of pending information kept in the audio light emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the hold number, and voice emission control unit 90 transmits the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of pending pieces included is set in the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In step S2004, the total hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is updated. In the total reserved number counter area, the sum of the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the number of the suspending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is heard. It is a counter area for specifying in side MPU92. In the updating process, the information of the total number of holding units counter area is the information of the sum of the information of the number of holding units measured in the first number of holding units counter area and the information of the number of holding units measured in the second number of holding units counter area Update to After execution of step S2004, the update process at the time of the winning combination is ended.

<Effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 29: S1804).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect to be executed in the current game run . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S 2101, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from the command, information on presence / absence of a big hit, type of big hit, presence / absence of reach occurrence, and fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2102 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2102: NO), the process proceeds to step S2103.

  In step S2103, an effect type setting process is executed. The setting process of the effect type executed in step S2103 is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game run. The process of setting the effect type will be described later. After executing step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104.

  In step S2104, stop symbol setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the stop symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol on the effective line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is an outlier, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the content of the fluctuation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L, which corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L The information is determined as the information on the result of the current stop. On the other hand, if it is determined that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L when it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is not a combination of reach symbols on the effective line L Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game play is executed. In the processing, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the combination of the information of the fluctuation time and the information of the stop symbol specified in the above step S2104 Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2106.

  In step S2106, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the current game run has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of the jackpot is determined based on the received variation command. If it is determined in step S2106 that a jackpot lottery has been won for the current game play (S2106: YES), the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, information of the effect type, stop symbol, and variation display pattern set in the current game run is stored. Specifically, the setting content in the effect setting process of step S2103 is stored. The present process is performed to reproduce the effect in the game round in which the jackpot lottery is won. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2106 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won (S2106: NO), the process proceeds to step S2112 without executing step S2107.

  When it is determined in step S2102 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2102: YES), the process proceeds to step S2108. That is, if it is determined that the process corresponding to the case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the fluctuation display pattern stored in step S2107 of the effect setting process related to the previous game run is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, the process of setting the effect type is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the information on the fluctuation display pattern read in step S2108. That is, an effect of the same content as the effect performed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2110.

  In step S2110, the stop symbol setting process is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the information on the variation display pattern read in step S2108. That is, the stop symbol of the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2111.

  In step S2111, setting processing of the variation display pattern is executed based on the information of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern read in step S2108. That is, the variable display pattern having the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game run is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2112.

  In step S2112, information of the effect type, the stop symbol and the fluctuation display pattern set in the current game run is set as the effect command. Thereafter, the process advances to step S2113 to transmit the effect command to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received effect command. After step S2113 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2114, and after the update process at the start of fluctuation is executed, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of the change will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2114) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S2201, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command is a first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2201 that the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202, and the first hold number counter stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is used. Subtract one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the fluctuation command received this time is not the first fluctuation command (S2201: NO), the process proceeds to step S2203, and the second hold number stored in the sound light side RAM 94 Subtract 1 from the counter. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  In step S2204, the information on the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the change is ended.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 29: S1806).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing opening effect setting processing. In step S2301, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2301 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2301: NO), the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, a normal start effect is set as an opening effect. In the present embodiment, as described in the case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect to be executed only in special cases such as the specific start effect (see FIG. 10C) is prepared. doing. In step S 2302, the start effect (normal start effect) to be executed except for the special case such as the case a 2 is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2305.

  If it is determined in step S2301 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2303, the process advances to step S2304 to turn off the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2305.

  In step S2305, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S 2302 or step S 2303. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received opening effect command. After executing step S2305, the present opening effect setting process is ended.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 29: S1813).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2401, it is determined whether the sound light side effect duplication flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2401 that the sound and light side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2402.

  In step S2402, it is determined whether the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2402 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2402: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403. In other words, if it is determined that the effect corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the first game round of case a1 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed (suggestive effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect), step S2403 move on.

  In step S2403, the information of the effect type, stop symbol, and fluctuation display pattern stored in step S2107 of the effect setting process (FIG. 32) is read out. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2404.

  In step S2404, special game state reproduction effects are constructed from the information read in step S2403. Thereafter, the processing proceeds to step S2405, and the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special gaming state after the first gaming cycle in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2409.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2402 that the sound light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2402: YES), the process proceeds to step S2406. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the first game round of case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2406.

  In step S2406, a suggestive effect is set as an ending effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2409.

  When it is determined in step S2401 that the sound and light side effect duplication flag is ON (S2401: YES), the process proceeds to step S2407. That is, when it is determined that the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special gaming state after the second gaming round of case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be performed, the process proceeds to step S2407.

  In step S2407, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is ended. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2408.

  In step S2408, the sound-light-side effect duplication flag is set to OFF, and then the process proceeds to step S2409.

  In step S2409, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect content set in step S2405, step S2406 or step S2407 is transmitted to the display MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received ending effect command. After step S2409 is executed, the ending effect setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, as shown in steps S2403 to S2405 and S2409, it indicates the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game cycle. When the voice emission control device 90 stores the information and executes the special game state reproduction effect, part of the ending command is a command indicating the effect type, the stop pattern, and the fluctuation display pattern executed again in the first game cycle. By transmitting the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 as an image, an image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives, as part of the ending command, a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game run, the MPU 102 receives the command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary to display an image of one frame at the image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the present game turn presentation on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Processing is defined information group. That is, in the pattern data table, a group of information corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the current game circulation effect is defined.

  The MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 reads an information group corresponding to each frame, and issues a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 to display an image of one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 according to a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 sequentially instructs the VDP 105 to draw information on the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, whereby the effect type executed in the first game round, stop symbol The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above-mentioned processing, but in addition, in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, other processing as the special game state reproduction effect is executed. The processing of may be adopted. For example, instead of processing for storing information indicating the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern executed in the first game run in the voice emission control device 90 as in the present embodiment, display from the voice emission control device 90 The control device 100 transmits a command instructing to temporarily store a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first gaming round. The display control device 100 temporarily stores a pattern data table corresponding to a combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variation display pattern executed in the first game time in accordance with the command.

  After that, when the special game state reproduction effect is executed, the voice light emission control device 90 outputs a command to the display control device 100 to instruct drawing to the VDP 105 according to the temporarily stored data table for pattern. . The display control device 100 can execute the special game state reproduction effect by instructing the VDP 105 to draw in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table in accordance with the command. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the processing for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly performed from the main processing repeatedly executed until the power is shut off after the power is turned on and the processing when the command is received from the sound emission control device 90 There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio light emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S2501, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2601, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S2701, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, while analyzing the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 37), the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S2701), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the mode of the effects such as the notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and displays the effect image according to the mode The drawing of the image can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41.

  In step S2702, display setting processing is performed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S2701) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Then, it progresses to step S2703.

  In step S2703, task processing is performed. In task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2702), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined by the task process (S2703) are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S2705 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the case a1, when the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game round is out, the notice effect performed after the suggestion effect, the reach effect The result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game run, and the player also recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the effect already performed. On the other hand, as in the case a2, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round is won, the notice effect, the reach effect and the result notice effect executed after the suggestion effect are already executed on the effect It is executed as an effect that reproduces the effect, but is actually a game repetition effect that is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. If the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 has been previously appreciated, the player executes the game reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time, similar to case a1. It is difficult to predict that the game has been won in the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run, while recognizing that it is merely a reproduction of the effect. In such a state, the player is notified that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won by the result notification staging after the preliminary announcement effect and the reach presentation are executed in the second gaming round, Is not the reproduction of the effect performed in the first game round, but the first game play, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect performed in the second game time for the first time at that time, and the second game Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery pertaining to the times. Thus, by executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game repetition reproduction effect in the case a2, not only the unexpectedness is given to the game, but also at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the effect to be played. In addition, by making the second gaming round in the case a2 an expansion that the player does not expect, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested to reproduce the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game round despite the jackpot lottery in the second game round being won. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is more difficult for the player to further predict that the jackpot lottery according to the second gaming round has been won. Therefore, unexpectedness can be further imparted to the game.

  In addition, when winning a big hit lottery concerning the 2nd game time in case a2, the reach production which is executed after the suggestion production is executed as a reproduction of the production which is already executed in the production, but it is actually Is executed due to having won the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting the player the expectation regarding the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, and when it is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed, Although the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed, in practice, at least three cases are set which are executed due to the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game time can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 39 is a time chart explaining the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 (b) of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, and the jackpot lottery is won in the second gaming round, and the first gaming round The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the second game cycle is continuous with the second game cycle has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as the case b1 shown in FIG. 39A, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game round, and A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when there is another game cycle (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game cycle) between one game cycle and the second game cycle will be described. In addition, the jackpot lottery in the previous game time is out.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. In the special game state, an opening effect, an open / close execution mode and an ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game round, the opening effect suggests the beginning of the special game state (the normal opening effect), and the ending effect indicates the end of the special game state Ending effect (normal ending effect) is executed. That is, as in the case a2 of FIG. 9B, the suggestion effect is not executed as the ending effect of the special game state.

  When the special game state is ended, the preceding game cycle is executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed in the preceding game.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory view for explaining an aspect of display of the symbol display device 41 when executing the suggestion effect in the preceding game. As shown in the drawing, when the suggestion effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. And in display field 41aS, change display and stop display of a symbol are performed. Specifically, of the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed in the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, a suggestive effect is performed. In this manner, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbol on a small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggested effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game. In addition, it is possible not to display the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol on the display surface 41a, and it is also possible to make the predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the symbol blink and light. . Even in this way, it is possible to execute the suggested effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the preceding game.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming cycle after executing a preceding gaming cycle. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 39 (a), the jackpot lottery is won also in the second gaming round. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as an effect in the second game play, a game repetition play that reproduces the effect executed in the first game play. That is, the notice effect, reach effect and result notice effect (big hit notice) executed in the first gaming round are executed. In this case, the notification effect (big hit notification) as a result has a function as a part of the game repetition effect and also has a function as a result notification about the jackpot lottery of the second game play. Then, with the end of the game repetition effect, the second game time is ended.

  Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game play, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the end of the second game play. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as an opening effect of the special game state thereafter, when the jackpot lottery relating to the second game time is a winning and the game repetition effect is executed in the second game time.

  The second embodiment can be realized, for example, by the process described below.

  Similar to the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 32: S2107), when the player wins the jackpot lottery in the first gaming round (FIG. 32: S2107), the effects executed in the first gaming round (in this embodiment, the advance notice) Store the effect, reach effect and result notification effect). In addition, the content to memorize | store may be another information, if it is information which can specify not only the presentation itself performed in the 1st game time but the presentation performed in the 1st game time. That is, the effects performed in the first game, such as information indicating the type (pattern) of effects performed in the first game, and address information of a memory in which effects performed in the first game are stored. The information may be any information that can be called again.

  After storing the effects executed in the first gaming round, the game determination (second gaming round) in which the jackpot lottery is won is specified by the destination determination processing, which is the gaming round executed after the first gaming round Then, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notice effect in the first game time stored are executed as a game reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game cycle are set to be the second by setting the variation time to be the same for any game cycle that has won the jackpot lottery. It is possible to execute within the fluctuation time in game time.

  In addition, when there is a preceding game time between the first game time and the second game time, this embodiment is realized by executing the suggestion effect according to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestion effect corresponding to each fluctuation time may be executed in each preceding game time, for example, a preceding game time to be executed immediately before the second game time. In the other preceding game times, a normal effect may be performed.

  Further, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and when a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time, the first game time and You may set the upper limit of the number of game times permitted as a preceding game time between the second game time.

  FIG. 39 (b) is a time chart explaining an example of processing in the case where a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, after winning the big hit lottery in the first game time, if there are five or less preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out (FIG. 39 (b )), In the second game turn to win the jackpot lottery after that, to execute the game play reproduction effect that reproduces the effect performed in the first game play, if there are six or more preceding game times (Not shown in the drawings), it is also possible not to execute the game repetition reproduction effect in the second game time of winning the jackpot lottery afterward. As the processing, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first gaming round, the effects (this embodiment) executed in the first gaming round as in the processing executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 39: S2107) In the above, the advance presentation effect, the reach effect and the result announcement effect) are stored in the sound side RAM 94.

  In addition, there is provided a preceding game time counter for counting the number of preceding game times between the first game time and the second game time, and when determining the effect of the second game time for winning the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. If the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game cycle is read out from the sound light side RAM 94, and in the second game cycle, the game cycle to reproduce the effect executed in the first game cycle The reproduction effect is executed, and when the counter value is 6 or more, the normal jackpot effect is performed in the second game play. By doing this, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. In addition, as for the suggestion effect, it is executed in the previous game time. Specifically, by the first determination process, the preceding game play immediately before the second play game is specified, and it is decided to execute the suggestion effect in the preceding play game. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the preceding game is determined, the suggestion effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of the preceding game is selected and executed. By doing this, it is possible to execute the game repetition reproduction effect even in the case where a plurality of preceding game times exist continuously between the first game time and the second game time. it can. In the present description, among the preceding game times after the first game time winning the big hit lottery, when there are six or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. After that, although it is assumed that the game repeat reproduction effect is not executed in the second game turn to win the big hit lottery, the number (threshold value) of preceding game times determined not to execute the game repeat effect is limited to six. It can be set to any number.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, another game is possible. By performing the suggestion effect in the turn, the suggestion effect and the game reproduction effect can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. In addition, even when a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) exist between the first game time and the second game time, a suggested effect corresponding to the fluctuation time of each preceding game time By executing this, it is possible to execute the game reproduction effect in the second game play without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 41 is a time chart explaining the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as a special game state reproduction effect and a game repetition reproduction effect, it reproduces at least a part of the effects executed in the first game time (FIG. 41: first preceding game time) as the first game time. A case where at least a part of the effect performed in the first game is reproduced will be described. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case c1 and case c2, as examples.

  FIG. 41 (a) shows a case c1 in which the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and the jackpot lottery occurs in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 Shows the process to be performed. In addition, as shown in the drawing, before the first gaming round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding gaming round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), in the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game cycle and the first game cycle. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect of giving notice that the jackpot lottery will be won in the first game play. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  In addition, the result notification effect in the first preceding game time in the case of executing the continuous effect is described using the above-mentioned FIG. 40, and the variable display and the stop display of the symbol are executed in the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a. . Specifically, of the unit game time, the fluctuation display of the symbol is executed in the fluctuation time, and the stop display of the symbol is executed in the stop time. On the other hand, continuous effect is performed in the display area 41aL. By doing this, it is possible to execute a series of continuous effects from the first preceding game cycle to the first game cycle without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, after executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect in the ending period. In this embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the reproduction effect is performed on the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game cycle to the first game cycle and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game cycle Do. In addition, when the variable display and stop display of the symbol are reproduced and executed as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a at the time of executing the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game round It is partly different from the contents of the symbol.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the special game state reproduction effect, and then executes the specific end effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming cycle. The jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game time is out. The pachinko machine 10 executes a normal advance notice effect and a result notice effect (off notice) in the second gaming session.

  Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 41 (b) will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, before the first gaming round to win the jackpot lottery, there is a first preceding gaming round in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out. Furthermore, in the case c2, before the second game cycle for winning the jackpot lottery, there is a second preceding game game where the lottery result for the jackpot lottery is out.

  Similar to the case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game cycle and the first game cycle. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery according to the first game run. In the first gaming session, a jackpot is notified as a result announcement effect.

  After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  In the case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. Then, the game repetition reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game time and the second game time. In case c2, as the game repetition reproduction effect, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

  After the end of the second gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game cycle, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  The third embodiment can be realized, for example, by the specific process described below.

  In the present embodiment, the effect executed in the four game cycles already executed is always stored in the RAM 96. Then, every time a winning to the first starting opening 33 occurs, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game run executed by the winning is grasped by the first determination processing.

  If it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game round is the jackpot as a result of the first judgment processing, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game round held one before the first game round If the result is off, continuous rendering is executed over the first preceding game time and the first game time.

  Then, when there are two or more held game times after the first game time until the first game time is ended, the result of the big hit lottery of the two game times is grasped by the first judgment process, If the result of the jackpot lottery of the two game times is out of a row, the case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game cycle.

  In addition, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the first played game is out of the two game times, and the result of the jackpot of the first played game is the jackpot, the case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the special gaming state to be executed after the first game cycle, and the game repetition effect is executed in the second preceding game cycle and the second game cycle.

  In case c2, if there is no second preceding game time, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the game time to be executed after the special gaming state after the first game time is a big hit, the second game time In the game, the continuous effects executed from the first preceding game play to the first game play may be executed as a game play effect. In this case, when the fluctuation time of the second game number is shorter than the time required to reproduce all of the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, continuous effects are executed from the game play before the first game play to the first game play, and Also, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect, the continuous effect can be reproduced. Further, by using the processes of the case c1 and the case c2 in combination, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
FIG. 42 is a time chart illustrating the process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game round in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out is executed as a game repetition effect in a second game round executed after the first game round. In the present description, the features of the process executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of the case d1 and the case d2 as examples.

  FIG. 42 (a) shows the case d1 where the pachinko machine 10 falls out of the jackpot lottery in the first gaming round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second gaming round executed after the first gaming round It shows the process to be performed. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game play. The reach effect to be performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 carries out an out-of-position notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming round. In the second gaming session, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect, a game repeat effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggested effect, an effect that suggests that the effect performed in the first game is reproduced, and also performs an advance effect and a reach performed in the first game period as a game reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, we make a big hit notice.

  After executing the second gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an open / close execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start presentation as an opening presentation. Also, as the ending effect, the normal ending effect is executed.

  Next, the case d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the case d2 falls out of the jackpot lottery in the first game time, and further falls out of the jackpot lottery in the second game time run after the first game time. The process which the pachinko machine 10 performs is shown. As illustrated, in the first game play, the notice effect and the reach effect are executed. The reach effect to be performed in this case is an effect that indicates to the player the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 carries out an out-of-position notification in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 executes a second gaming round. In the second gaming session, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestive effect, a game repeat effect, and a result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggested effect, an effect that suggests that the effect performed in the first game is reproduced, and also performs an advance effect and a reach performed in the first game period as a game reproduction effect. Perform the production. In addition, as a result notification effect, out-of-range notification is performed.

  The fourth embodiment can be realized, for example, by the specific process described below.

  By executing the first determination process each time a winning to the first starting opening 33 occurs, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery pertaining to the held game round is successful. And, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times held at least two or more ahead has been won, the game time in which the jackpot lottery has been elected (equivalent to the second game time of the case d1) While performing advance notice effect and reach effect in the game round (corresponding to the first game time) held one before, the notice effect and reach effect executed are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed preview effect and the reach effect itself, and may be other information as long as it is information that can read the executed advance effect and the reach effect again. Good.

  After executing the reach effect in the first gaming round, the pachinko machine 10 carries out the off notice as the result notice effect. After that, in the second gaming session, while performing the suggestion effect, the stored notice effect and the reach effect are executed as the game effect. In addition, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. Case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

  In addition, case d2 is executed ahead of the two reserved game times when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out by executing the first determination process. It can be realized by reproducing reach effects in the game times played, and in the game times to be performed later, the suggested effects and the notice effects and reach effects performed in the previous game times as the game reproduction effect. . In this case, in the second gaming round, the fluctuation time of the second gaming round is shorter than the time required to execute all of the advance presentation effect and the reach presentation in the first gaming round as a game replay reproduction effect. In the case, for example, part or all of the advance notice effect to be executed as the game repeat effect may be omitted according to the fluctuation time of the second game time.

  On the other hand, if, in the second gaming round, the fluctuation time of the second gaming round is longer than the time required to execute all of the advance presentation and reach presentation in the first gaming round as the gaming round reproduction staging In, for example, according to the fluctuation time of the 2nd game time, execution time of suggestion production may be made long production. Necessary for suggestive effects and game repercussion effects by preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects corresponding to the time necessary for the effect, and selecting the optimal suggestive effects according to the fluctuation time of the second game cycle Time can be made the same as the fluctuation time of the second game time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment, by executing the processing of the case d1, although the jackpot lottery relating to the second gaming round has been elected, Since the effect executed in the first game round where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed in the second game round as the game repetition reproduction effect, the jackpot lottery according to the second game round is won It is difficult to make a player expect. In addition, by executing the suggestion effect which suggests reproducing the effect in the first game round which went out to the jackpot lottery before the execution of the game repetition reproduction effect, in the second game round, the first game It is possible to further give the player the recognition that the effect performed in the game is only reproduced. Then, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round has been won for the first time only after notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second gaming round by the notification means. Can be given. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run is won by executing the processing of the case d2, also when the lottery result for the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run is out, Since the game repetition reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery concerning the game circulation in which the game circulation reproduction effect is executed is not necessarily a jackpot. As a result, when the game repetition effect is executed, the player is given an emotional feeling of expectation and a sense of anticipation, and the player's attention to the game times in which the already executed effect is reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. Fifth embodiment (an example of setting process of effect type):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of a process executed in the effect type setting process (FIG. 32: S2103) described in the first embodiment will be described. The setting process of the effect type is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game run in the sound emission control device 90 (sound side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the process of setting the effect type performed by the sound-light MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory view showing an outline of setting processing of effect type. When the sound light side MPU 92 starts setting processing of the effect type, the display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, the display pattern random number counter for object C to determine the contents of the notice effect The counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

  Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used to determine how to combine a plurality of object images constituting the notice effect in each game play. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect in each game run is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display mode of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, how to combine the three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the timing of display are determined, and are set as advance notice effects. Here, three types of object images constituting the notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing an object A which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object A shows the behavior of the character representing a person, and is composed of three images of an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3. FIG. 44 (a) shows an image A1, FIG. 44 (b) shows an image A2, and FIG. 44 (c) shows an image A3. The object A is an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, and One of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an object B which is an object image constituting the advance notice effect. As illustrated, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 45 (a) shows the image B1, FIG. 45 (b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 45 (c) shows the image B3. The object B is an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, There is a case where one of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 is displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing an object C which is an object image that constitutes advance notice effects. As illustrated, the object C shows the behavior of the dog contained in the box, and is composed of three images of an image C1, an image C2, and an image C3. 46 (a) shows the image C1, FIG. 46 (b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 46 (c) shows the image C3. The object C is displayed as an image which changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, when displayed as an object image of a moving image, and There is a case where one of the image C1, the image C2 and the image C3 is displayed as a still image by being displayed continuously for a predetermined period.

  As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the advance effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described with reference to FIGS.

  Description is returned to FIG. After acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table for object A, the display pattern table for object B, and the display pattern table for object C, and displays each display pattern random number counter. The collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed, and the display pattern is determined for each object.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for the object A has a big hit if the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, and if the result of the big hit lottery is off and the reach effect is executed (“off (reach)), the big hit It is divided into three cases where the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed ("out (reach no)"), and the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 for each case. In the present embodiment, as the display pattern of the object A, a pattern (not displayed) in which the object A is not displayed, and a pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed (the display pattern in FIG. A1) a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying an image A1 and an image A2, a pattern for sequentially displaying an image A1, an image A2, and an image A3 (A1) 1-A2 over A3) and is set in advance.

  When setting the advance notice effect in the predetermined game play, the sound-light side MPU 92 checks which of the following cases corresponds to the game play: big hit, missed (reach present), or missed (reach no). Then, in the display pattern table, the corresponding part of the game time is referred to. For example, when the game play is a jackpot, the "jackpot" column of the display pattern table is referred to. And it collates with the value of the acquired display pattern random number counter C11, and determines a display pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 47, in the present embodiment, the method of allocating the value of the random number to each display pattern is different in each case of the jackpot, the presence (reach) and the absence (reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed in the case of a jackpot, displayed in the case of out (reach), and displayed in the case of out (reach). It is different from That is, the display probability of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is higher in the order of the jackpot, the out (reach), and the out (reach). Conversely, the displayed probability of the display pattern (A1) is higher in the order of out (reach nothing), out (reach existence), and the jackpot. Therefore, in the notice effect in the game session, the probability that the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed has a higher probability of being a big win than the case where only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) Is set so that the probability of being a big hit is higher in the case where the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than in the case where is displayed. That is, the effect by the object A indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and also the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, the degree of expectation Functions as a step-up effect.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is different in the method of distributing the value of the random number in each of the big hit, the out (reach) and the out (reach). The expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object A, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up effect of the object B, and the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the step-up instruction of the object C are respectively different. For example, in the object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for the object B is not displayed in the game round in the case of disengaging (reaching no) but is displayed in the disengaging (reaching) and jackpot cases. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the case of out of reach (no reach) in the display pattern for object B, this can be realized by setting “non-display” in all cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing this, the expectation of the jackpot indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed can be made different from the expectation of the jackpot when the object A and the object B are displayed. That is, in the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C, the method of distributing the value of the random number in each case of the big hit, the out (reach) and the out (reach no) is set differently. In addition to the step-up aspect of each object image, the jackpot expectation can be expressed also by the presence or absence of display of each object. By doing this, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach) and each display pattern random number For example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further classified into 16R probability variation jackpots, 8R probability variation jackpots, 16R normal jackpots, 8R normal jackpots, rendering by the object B is expected for a probability variation jackpot You may make it function as a step-up effect which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is a high probability mode) exists, the effect by the object C is the expectation of the probability change state of the current game It may be made to function as a step-up effect showing. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has different types (for example, jackpot expectations and The degree of pros and cons of the game may be shown.

  As shown in FIG. 43, after determining the display pattern for the object A, the object B, and the object C, the sound light side MPU 92 arranges the objects in order to combine the objects and display them on the display surface 41a. Set the position and the display timing of each object. Specifically, the sound light side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position of each object and the display timing with reference to the arrangement / timing setting table set in advance.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory view of the arrangement / timing setting table. As illustrated, the arrangement / timing setting table starts displaying on the display surface 41a of each object, the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object to be displayed, and The timing is set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, a display pattern (A1-A2) for object A, a display pattern (not shown) for object B, and a display pattern (C1-C2- for object C). In the case of C3), since the objects to be displayed are the object A and the object C, reference is made to “A · C” in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement coordinates of the object A and the object C are such that the center coordinates of the object A are located at (Xa2, Ya2) of the display surface 41a for the object A. The object C is displayed in such a manner that the center coordinates of the object C are positioned at (Xc1, Yc1) of the display surface 41a. Furthermore, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the display of object A starts 2 seconds after the game is started, and the display of object C is started after the game is started The display is set to start after one second of tc.

  Although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 48 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a is The arrangement of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of the display start are set so as not to overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the display surface 41 a is in such a manner that the objects have relevance. As shown in FIG. 5, the arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table (relative arrangement position between objects) and the timing of display start (relative timing between objects) are set. Furthermore, the timing of arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of display start are set so that objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap with each other.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the notice effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 49 shows the case where the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 48 change with time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 49 (a), FIG. 49 (b) and FIG. 49 (c). FIG. 49 shows a notice effect that object A, object B and object C are combined, and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for object A, and the display pattern (B1-B2) for object B. -B3) is displayed, and for the object C, the notice effect set so as to display the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is shown.

  In the notice effect shown in Fig. 49, a person who was walking on a sunny day finds a box and notices that the dog is in the box while the weather gradually gets worse, and raises a dog umbrella. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is considered, and each object has relevance. Furthermore, the timing of the arrangement of the display object in the arrangement / timing setting table and the display start timing is set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41 a in a manner having narrative. By doing this, it is possible to make the advance notice effect executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period into an effect that the player does not have a sense of incongruity, and by having a narrative character. It is possible to improve interest.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49 (c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character representing a person, and a process for displaying only a layer image showing a character representing a person Is running. By doing this, it is possible to make an effect in which a plurality of object images are displayed an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In FIG. 49, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is subjected to the process of not displaying the image frame, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) The image frame of part or all of the image A2 and the image A3 may not be displayed. The same process may be performed on other object images.

  The sound light side MPU 92 sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object in this manner, and sets the notice effect.

  Next, the process of setting the effect type described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the effect type. The setting process of the effect type is executed by the sound-side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

  In step S2801, counter values are acquired from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2802, and it is checked whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is to be set are the jackpot, the disconnection (reach), or the disconnection (reach not). After executing step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803.

  In step S2803, the display patterns for the objects A to C are referenced to determine the display pattern of each object. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2804.

  In step S2804, when the display pattern is set in each object, it is determined whether or not there is no object display in the notice effect of the game round. That is, it is determined whether the display pattern of all the objects A to C is "non-display".

  If it is determined in step S2804 that the object display is not absent (not displayed) in the notice effect in the game run (S2804: NO), the process proceeds to step S2805, and the arrangement / timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each object and the timing to start the display on the display surface 41a are determined. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2804 that the object display is not present (not displayed) in the notice effect of the game run (S2804: YES), the process proceeds to step S2806 without executing step S2805.

  In step S2806, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing to start the display of each object are set as the advance notice effect in the game run. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2807.

  In step S2807, it is determined whether or not the game play is a jackpot or a miss (reach). In other words, it is determined whether or not reach effect is to be executed after the advance effect is executed in the game session.

  If it is determined in step S2807 that the game play is a big hit or is out (reach) (S2807: YES), the process proceeds to step S2808 to execute reach effect setting processing. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2809.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2807 that the game play is not a jackpot or a miss (reach) (S2807: NO), the process proceeds to step S2809 without executing step S2808.

  In step S2809, the advance notice effect and the reach effect set in step S2806 and step S2808 are set as an effect command. Then, the setting process of the said effect classification is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the objects are displayed in the same period as the preview effect, they are displayed on the display surface 41 a in a mutually relevant manner, and therefore, the objects are the same. The effect performed by being displayed in the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object is displayed in the same period as other objects, and not displayed in the same period (that is, when each object is displayed alone). The presentation can be performed, and the object can be used effectively.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed in a related manner in a narrative manner, so that the plurality of object images are in the same period The effect to be executed by being displayed on the screen can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having a narrative effect produced by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different in how random numbers are distributed in the respective cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach). The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game indicated by the step-up effect by the object images of the object A, the object B and the object C and the expectation of the jackpot differ from one another. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game varies depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed in the same period, so the player's attention to the effect, the degree of interest, Expectations can be improved.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting of the display pattern table, for example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is performed by 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, 16R normal variation, 8R normal variation By dividing into jackpots, the effect by the object B can be functioned as a step-up effect that indicates the expected degree of probability variation jackpot. That is, the effect by each object can be functioned as an effect indicating the degree of advantage / unfavorability of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the object images are displayed in the same period, the relative positions of the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at the predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative position between the objects is taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are such that each object is related. The arrangement of display objects in the setting table and the timing of the start of display are set. Further, the timing of arrangement of display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and timing of display start are set so that objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. In addition, since each object image is displayed in the same period and not displayed in the same period (that is, each object is displayed alone), a plurality of effects are performed using each object image. Object image can be used effectively.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, for example, the object A has the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). May be displayed in three different display modes. Relative positions with respect to other object images (object B and object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement in correspondence with each display mode. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be performed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), the relative position between each object image is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position, so that in each display mode, each object Images are not superimposed and displayed without any relevance. Therefore, various effects performed by displaying each object image in the same period can improve the quality of the effects without giving the player a complicated impression.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 48, the timing at which display of each object is started on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement / timing setting table. Therefore, when each object image is displayed in the same period, it is displayed at a relatively predetermined timing between the object images, and therefore, each object image is displayed at a non-relevant timing. I have not. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image (moving image in the present embodiment) that changes with time, various effects can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability that the object A will be a big hit in the big hit lottery when it is displayed as the advance effect, the probability that it will be a big hit in the big hit lottery when the object B is displayed as the advance effect, The probability of becoming a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as a preliminary effect is different from each other. Furthermore, the probability of becoming a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as the preview effect also differs from one another. By doing this, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the object image.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of setting process of effect type):
Next, as a sixth embodiment, another example of effect type setting processing (FIG. 32: S2103) will be described. As described above, the setting process of the effect type is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game round in the sound emission control device 90 (sound side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the process of setting the effect type performed by the sound-light MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. Thereafter, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of an outline of setting processing of effect type in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described fifth embodiment is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the preview effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of the objects to be displayed in the notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a combination of a plurality of types of objects to be displayed in the notice effect is preset by the display object table, and the sound light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays By collating with the object table, the combination of objects to be displayed in the preview effect is determined.

  In the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position of the object displayed in the notice effect and the display start timing are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table. The arrangement position of each object and the timing of the start of display are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern of. The details will be described below.

  When the sound-light-side MPU 92 starts the process of setting the effect type, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the notice effect. Determine the combination.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a display object table. As illustrated, in the display object table, the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and the combination of each object to be displayed as the advance notice effect are set in association with each other. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the object A and the object C are set as object images to be displayed in the notice effect. The display object table in the present embodiment differs in the method of allocating the value of the display object random number (the number of values to be allocated) to the combination of each object displayed as the advance notice effect. For example, when only the object A is displayed as a display object, the value of the display object random number is 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. The values of the display object random numbers when the object A and the object B are displayed are 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the values of the display object random numbers are 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. Thus, the frequency at which the combination of each object is displayed as the advance notice effect is different because the number of allocations of the values of the display object random number to the combination of each object is different.

  Description is returned to FIG. After determining the combination of the objects to be displayed in the advance presentation effect, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires counter values at a predetermined timing from the display pattern random number counter C22. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time update is performed, and the value is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of display objects determined previously, and collates the acquired display pattern random number counter C22 with the counter value To determine the display pattern corresponding to the combination of display objects. In FIG. 51, the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table show a case where it is determined that the object A and the object C are displayed as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In this case, the sound light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory view showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for AC is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the object A and the object C are set in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern (not displayed) in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed is combined with the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C A pattern (A1 / C1) to be displayed, a pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2) to display the image C1 of the object C and the image C2 while displaying the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A in order, an image of the object A A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set which displays A1 and image A2 in order and displays image C1 of object C, image C2 and image C3 in order. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for each display pattern, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41 a and the timing of display start are set in advance, and the display pattern is determined. The placement position and the timing of the display start are determined.

  For example, when it is determined that the game A is a big hit and the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table display the object A and the object C as a combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect. In the case where the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the notice effect is determined as (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 54 (a), FIG. 54 (b) and 54 (c). As illustrated, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are sequentially displayed on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are sequentially displayed. As described above, in the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3), the arrangement positions of the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A and the timing of the display start, the image C1 of the object C, the image C2 and the image C3 Since the arrangement position and the timing of the display start are set in advance, the mode of the advance presentation effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  Although the display pattern table for AC has been described in FIG. 53, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. Further, for each display pattern table, a plurality of types of display patterns are set by combinations of images of the objects.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the A display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for A, the non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2) and display pattern (A1) in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of -A2-A3) (see FIG. 44) are allocated. As illustrated, the display pattern table for A is out (in the absence of reach), the display pattern (A1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of out (with reach). In the above, the display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of display. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image A2 on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery increases, and when the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image A1, the jackpot lottery Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for B will be described.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram of a B display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for B, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3), the display pattern (B1-B2), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3), and the display pattern (B1-B2) in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 45) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for B is out (no reach), the display pattern (B1-B2-B3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and is out (reach). In the case of “Yes”, the display pattern (B1-B2) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) is the most frequent among the four display patterns. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of display. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, unlike the above-described advance presentation effect by the object A, the player subsequently displays the image B1 on the display surface 41a. The expectation for winning of the big hit lottery decreases when the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, and then the display surface 41a is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image B2 is displayed after the image B1 on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning of the jackpot lottery decreases.

  Next, the C display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram of a C display pattern table. In the case of the display pattern table for C, in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), display pattern (C1) Four display patterns of -C2-C3) (see FIG. 46) are allocated. As shown in the figure, in the case of detachment (no reach), the display pattern (C1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of detachment (reach), the above four displays Among the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. Thus, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 is assigned. By allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this manner, the player can display the image C2 on the display surface 41a later than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for the winning of the jackpot lottery increases, and the image when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a is later than the image C2 displayed on the display surface 41a after the image C1. Expectations for winning will increase.

  Next, the display pattern table for AB will be described.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for AB. In the case of the display pattern table for AB, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) and the display pattern (A1) are non-display, respectively, in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of -A2-A3 / B1) and display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for AB is out (no reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) among the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. In the case of out of reach (reach), the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display among the four display patterns is displayed. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so that the frequency at which the pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is displayed is high.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the display pattern table for AB. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 59 (a), FIG. 59 (b) and FIG. 59 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect represents that the person who was walking gets wet in the rain while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing to rain.

  When an image composed of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 59 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image represents a person walking on a sunny day, and in general, the impression is bad Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of an image A2 and an image B2 shown in FIG. 59 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person noticed that the weather changed from sunny to cloudy. Generally gives an impression that it can not be said to be good as compared with the image shown in FIG. 59 (a), and gives the player an advantage over the game situation as compared with the image in FIG. 59 (a). Give a sense that can not say. Then, when an image consisting of an image A2 and an image B3 shown in FIG. 59 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person getting wet in the rain is expressed in the image, and a generally bad impression is given, Give the player an adverse recognition regarding the situation of the game. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) causes the player to change the recognition of the game situation to an adverse recognition as the display of the advance notice effect progresses.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the display pattern table for AB. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 60 (a), FIG. 60 (b) and FIG. 60 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, it is realized that the person walking is clear and holding an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

  When an image composed of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 60 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a clear day is represented in the image, and in general, the impression is bad. Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image A2 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 60 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who noticed that the image is clear is represented in the image, and the image is also displayed Similar to the image of FIG. 60 (a), since generally no bad impression is given, the player is not given an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image A3 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 60 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the person expresses an anti-suntan person by putting an umbrella on the image, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression, but gives recognition that can not be said to be disadvantageous with respect to the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player the recognition that it is difficult to judge the situation as advantageous or disadvantageous with respect to the game situation even if the display of the advance notice effect proceeds.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 61 (a), FIG. 61 (b) and FIG. 61 (c). As shown in the figure, while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing as the weather changes, the person who was walking notices the change in the weather, opens an umbrella, and responds appropriately to the deterioration of the weather. Is expressed.

  When an image composed of an image A1 and an image B1 shown in FIG. 61 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a clear day is represented in the image, and in general, the impression is bad Since the player does not give the player, he does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 61 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the person noticed that the weather changed from sunny to cloudy. In order to give an impression which can not be said to be good as compared with the image shown in FIG. 61 (a) in general, the player has an advantage over the game situation as compared with the image in FIG. 61 (a). Give recognition that can not be said. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A3 and an image B3 shown in FIG. 61C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image is expressed by a person who has been able to appropriately cope with the deterioration of the weather by putting an umbrella on it. In general, it gives a good impression and gives an advantageous perception of the gaming situation. That is, the advance notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player a recognition in the image of FIG. 61 (a) that can not be said to be disadvantageous with respect to the game situation, and then In the image of FIG. 61 (b), the player is given a recognition that can not be said to be advantageous with respect to the game situation, and thereafter, the image in FIG. 61 (c) is given an advantageous recognition with respect to the game situation. . By displaying such advance notice effects, it is possible to give tonation to the player's expectation for the game.

  As shown in FIG. 59, FIG. 60, and FIG. 61, the effects set by the display pattern table for AB recognize that the player has an advantage or disadvantage in the game situation as the advance effect proceeds. It is configured to give. In particular, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 59 is compared with the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. Since FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 61 (a) are the same image, FIG. 59 (b) and FIG. 61 (b) are the same image, and any preview effects are the same image halfway through The player can be given a sense of urgency as to which of the advance notice effect of FIG. 59 and the advance notice effect of FIG. More specifically, the player can be given a sense of urgency in response to a change such as whether or not the person who noticed the change in weather finally holds an umbrella, and the player's attention to the notice effect It is possible to improve the interest of the game by improving it.

  Next, the display pattern table for BC will be described.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory view of a display pattern table for BC. In the case of the display pattern table for BC, the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) and the display pattern (B2-B3) are non-display respectively in the three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). Four display patterns of / C1-C3) and display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for BC is out (no reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and is out In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (of the four display patterns ( The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so that the frequency of displaying B1 / C1-C2-C3) is high.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the display pattern table for BC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 63 (a), FIG. 63 (b) and FIG. 63 (c). As illustrated, while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy, the appearance of the dog appearing in the box and the dog getting wet in the rain is expressed while the weather changes from cloudy to rainy.

  When an image consisting of an image B2 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 63 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in cloudy weather, and in general, As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 63 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain, The image also does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. However, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 63 (c) is subsequently displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog showing a large face in the box gets wet in the image. In general, it gives a bad impression and gives the player an adverse recognition as to the gaming situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives the player an disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation when the image of FIG. 63 (c) is displayed.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the display pattern table for BC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 64 (a), FIG. 64 (b) and FIG. 64 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect is expressed as the weather changes from cloudy to rain and a box is placed in such weather.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 64 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in a cloudy state, and in general, As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image consisting of an image B3 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 64 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain, The image also does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 64 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image does not change from the image of FIG. 64 (b) and the image is also a game Does not give the player an adverse understanding of the gaming situation. Thus, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 65 (a), FIG. 65 (b) and FIG. 65 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect represents that the dog makes a face out of the box on a sunny day.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 65 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed while it is sunny, and in general As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image consisting of an image B1 and an image C2 shown in FIG. 65 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses the appearance of the dog taking a face out of the box while it is fine Compared with FIG. 65 (a), the player is given an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning a big hit lottery, so FIG. Also in the notice effect by the object B and the object C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 65 (a) to FIG. 65 (b), the image by the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2 to the player On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image expresses the appearance of the dog having a large face out of the box while it is fine In general, a good impression is given to the player to give an advantageous recognition of the game situation. As described above, the effect by the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is the same as the advance effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. Since an image that gives a bad impression is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation as the advance notice proceeds.

  Here, among the effects set by the display pattern table for BC, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 63 and the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. The comparison with the advance presentation by-C3) is described.

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the image on the way. Specifically, FIGS. 63 (a) and 64 (a) are the same images, and FIGS. 63 (b) and 64 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same. However, depending on the image to be displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 63 (c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3 and the image of the dog getting wet in the rain generally gives a bad impression, so the situation of the game for the player Give an adverse perception about. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 64 (c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and an image in which a box is placed in the rain is an image that does not give a bad impression. On the other hand, it does not give an disadvantageous recognition about the situation of the game. In other words, in the state where the image obtained by combining the image B2 and the image C1 is displayed, if the image C1 subsequently changes to the image C3, the image is as shown in FIG. Against the game situation, while the image C1 is not changed after the image B2 and the image C1 are displayed in a state in which the image C1 is not changed. Since the image is as shown in FIG. 64 (c), the player is not given an adverse recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 63 or the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 64 and displaying the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, the game is performed whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3. While being able to attract the attention of the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57 described above, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Is displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image in which a dog is showing a face out of a box generally gives a better impression than an image in which a box is placed. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation. Further, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 has a higher probability of winning a big win, so the image More about the game situation for the player when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 than when the C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 Give an advantageous recognition.

  However, in the case where the image C1 and the image C3 are combined with the image B3, when the image C1 is combined with the image B3 and displayed on the display surface 41a (FIG. 64 (c)), the image C3 A more advantageous recognition of the game situation is given to the player than when it is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 63 (c)).

  That is, when the image B1 (image of rain) is not combined with each of the image C1 and the image C3, the image C3 (in the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. The image B3 (image of rain) is displayed on each of the image C1 and the image C3 despite the fact that the image of the dog is displayed on the display surface 41a gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. When the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the combination of the images C1 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation.

  Therefore, the way of combining the images can give the player various recognitions about the game situation. In the case of the present embodiment, when the predetermined image is combined with the effect image which is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the degree of expectation are high, the player having a completely different recognition of the game situation Can be given to Even if the player recognizes the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, the presence or absence of the display of the image B3 (the image of rain) Recognize that the game situation is different. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved.

  Further, as described in the display pattern table for C in FIG. 57, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image of a box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (image of rain). The image C1 (box image) is displayed even though the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the dog image in the box is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (rain image). If the image B3 (the image of rain) is displayed in combination, the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed in combination with the image B3 (the image of rain) to win the jackpot lottery Have a high probability of Therefore, when the image of the object C or a part thereof such as the image C1 (image of a box) or the image C3 (image of a dog in a box) is displayed, the image B3 (image of rain) is displayed. The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

  In general, the effect image having a higher probability of winning the jackpot lottery as the step-up is performed (e.g., as the effect image progresses from image P1 to image P2 to image P3) is an image from image P1 to image P2 than image P2 P3 is configured to be an image that gives the player a good impression. That is, in the image P1, the image P2 and the image P3, the order of the high and low probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the order of the impression given to the player are configured. With such a configuration, the player's sense of expectation can be improved as the effect image steps up (advances). To display [image P1 + image Q], [image P2 + image Q], and [image P3 + image Q] by combining other images (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, the image P3 + the image Q is better than the image P1 + the image Q, and the image P3 + the image Q is better than the image P 2 + the image Q! Configured That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the image Q is simply combined, the [image P2 + the image Q] is more to the player than the [image P3 + the image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image to be displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the combined image. In this embodiment, by devising the contents of the image P1, the image P2, the image P3 and the image Q, although the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, the image Q is combined. In this case, it is possible to give the player a better impression of [Image P2 + Image Q] than [Image P3 + Image Q].

  By doing this, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. That is, in the effect image which is not combined with the image Q, the progress of the image P1 → the image P2 → the image P3 gives recognition that the game situation is more advantageous, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, It becomes possible to give recognition that the situation of a game is disadvantageous, so that it progresses with Q] → [image P2 + image Q] → [image P3 + image Q].

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of a display pattern table for ABC. In the case of the display pattern table for ABC, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3-C3 / C1-C2-C3) is non-display in each of three cases of big hit, off (reach) and off (reach no). 4) display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) and display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are allocated. There is. As illustrated, in the case of the display pattern table for ABC being out of reach (without reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the four display patterns is the most. When the frequency of display is high and the display is out (reach), the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and the jackpot is large. In the case of a display pattern of 0 to 99, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

  Next, the display pattern table for AC will be described.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67 (a), FIG. 67 (b) and FIG. 67 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, a person who was walking while the weather was sunny, cloudy, changing with rain, and a dog whose face came out of the box was expressed as being wet in the rain There is.

  When an image composed of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 67 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a box are represented in the image while it is clear, and in general As it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player an adverse recognition of the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and the person changes the weather. And the appearance of the dog making a slight face out of the box, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. However, when an image consisting of an image A2, an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is subsequently displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows the person who noticed the change in the weather and the inside of the box. It is expressed that the dog with a large face gets wet from the rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives a torment to the player's sense of expectation for the game, and at the end of the notice effect, Give an adverse recognition regarding the gaming situation.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory view showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 68 (b) and FIG. 68 (c). As shown in the drawing, the notice effect is expressed as a person who notices the change in the weather while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy and how the dog looks out of the box.

  When an image consisting of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 68A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who is walking and a box are placed in the image while it is sunny In general, the player does not give an adverse recognition of the game situation, because the player does not give a bad impression. Thereafter, when an image composed of an image A2, an image B2 and an image C2 shown in FIG. 68 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices a change in the weather in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy. A person and how a dog makes a few faces out of a box are expressed, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Then, when an image consisting of an image A2, an image B2 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 68C is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog who makes a face out of a box are expressed in cloudy weather. The image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. In this manner, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the display pattern table for ABC. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 69 (a), FIG. 69 (b) and FIG. 69 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect is expressed that the person who was walking notices the change in the weather while the weather is sunny, cloudy, and changing with rain, and the dog who raised his face out of the box lifts the umbrella It is done.

  When an image composed of an image A1, an image B1 and an image C1 shown in FIG. 69 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who is walking and a box are placed in the image while it is sunny In general, the player does not give an adverse recognition of the game situation, because the player does not give a bad impression. After that, when the image composed of the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 69 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change of the weather in the weather changing from sunny to cloudy A person and how a dog makes a few faces out of a box are expressed, and the image does not give the player an adverse recognition regarding the game situation. Then, when an image composed of an image A3, an image B3 and an image C3 shown in FIG. 69 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog and the dog who made a large face out of the box in the rain A person to be pointed out is expressed, and the image generally gives a moving impression, and thus gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Thus, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) provides the player with an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  Here, among the effects set by the display pattern table for ABC, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 67 and the effect shown in FIG. The comparison with the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) will be described.

  The two preview effects are the same image up to the image on the way. Specifically, FIGS. 67 (a) and 69 (a) are the same images, and FIGS. 67 (b) and 69 (b) are the same images. Therefore, regardless of which of the two advance notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the situation of the game given to the player is the same. However, depending on the image to be displayed after that, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two preview effects. The image in FIG. 67 (c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3 are combined, and an image in which a person and a dog get wet is generally an image giving a bad impression. On the contrary, give an adverse recognition about the situation of the game. On the other hand, the image of FIG. 69 (c) is an image in which the image A3, the image B3 and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person is raising an umbrella to prevent the dog from getting wet in the rain Is an image that gives a good impression, and thus gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in a state where an image in which the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 are combined is displayed, and the image A2 does not change after that, the image is as shown in FIG. 67 (c). In a state where an image in which the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 are combined is displayed, the image A2 is subsequently displayed as the image A3. In the case where the image is changed, since the image is as shown in FIG. 69C, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, whether the image A2 is changed to the image A3 by displaying the image combining the image A2, the image B2 and the image C2 by executing the preview effect shown in FIG. 67 or the preview effect shown in FIG. While being able to attract a player's attention to the point, it can give a player a tense feeling.

  Further, the notice effect based on the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 69 has the following characteristics.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 56 described above, the appearance of the worsening of the weather is expressed as the effect image progresses with the image B1, the image B2, the image B3 and so on. As they do, they give the player an adverse recognition of the gaming situation. Further, when the notice effect by the display pattern table for B in FIG. 56 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3 is set to a lower probability of winning a big hit lottery Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3 and the effect image progress, the player is further given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. That is, the object B gives the player a disadvantageous recognition by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2 and the image B3.

  However, the object B is combined with the object A in which the images progress in the order of the image A1, the image A2 and the image A3, and the object C in which the images proceed in the order of the image C1, the image C2 and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change to an effect image of content that impresses the player, and for the player, it is advantageous for the game situation. It can be changed to an image that gives recognition. As described above, each image configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment is displayed as one object and in combination with other objects by devising the content of the image. In some cases, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and it is also possible to greatly change the recognition of the game situation given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or the notice effect consisting of a combination thereof is used as an effect indicating whether or not the jackpot lottery has been won. That is, although these advance notice effects are used as effects showing the expectation of the jackpot, the expectation of the probability change jackpot or the expectation of being in the probability change state may be used as the effect showing the player. Also in this case, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the game situation is advantageous or a disadvantage depending on how the images of the objects are combined.

  Next, the process of setting the effect type in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing processing for setting an effect type in the sixth embodiment. The setting process of the effect type is executed by the sound-side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

  In step S2901, the counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, proceeding to step S2902, the display object table is referenced, collation with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21 is executed, and a combination of objects to be displayed as advance notice effect is determined. After executing step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903.

  In step S2903, the counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2904, and it is checked whether the game times for which the advance notice effect is to be set are the jackpot, the disconnection (reach), or the disconnection (reach not). After executing step S2904, the process proceeds to step S2905.

  In step S2905, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of the objects to be displayed as the advance presentation effect is referenced, collation with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is executed, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process proceeds to step S2906, and the determined display pattern is set as the notice effect. After executing step S2906, the process proceeds to step S2907.

  In step S2907, it is determined whether the game play is a big hit. If it is determined in step S2907 that the game play is a big hit (S2907: YES), the process proceeds to step S2908.

  In step S2908, it is determined whether the display pattern of the advance notice effect set in step S2906 is a full display pattern. Here, in the full display pattern, the combination of the objects displayed as the preview effect is the object A, the object B, and the object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2- B3 / C1-C2-C3) refers to a display pattern. That is, the display pattern shown in FIG. If it is determined in step S2908 that the set display pattern of the preliminary rendering effect is the full display pattern (S2908: YES), the process proceeds to step S2909.

  In step S2909, as the setting process of reach effect, the reach effect to be executed after the advance effect of the full display pattern is set as a sequel effect that expresses the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory view showing an example of a sequel effect to be executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As illustrated, the sequel effect is an effect showing a person walking with a dog under his umbrella in the rain. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the probability of being a big hit is high, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  The description is returned to FIG. After setting a sequel effect as the reach effect in step S2909, the process proceeds to step S2910.

  If it is determined in step S2907 that the game play is not a big hit (S2907: NO), the process proceeds to step S2911.

  In step S2911, it is determined whether the game times are reach, that is, whether the game times are out (reach). If it is determined in step S2911 that the game play is a reach (S2911: YES), or if it is determined that the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S2908 is not a full display pattern (S2908: NO), The process proceeds to step S2912.

  In step S2912, a normal reach effect is set as the setting process of the reach effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2910.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2911 that the game number is not reach (S2911: NO), the process proceeds to step S2910 without executing step S2912.

  In step S2910, the notice effect set in step S2906 and the reach effect set in step S2909 are set as the effect command. Thereafter, the process of setting the effect type is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the recognition of the advantages / disadvantages of the game situation given to the player depending on the combination of each object, so that various effects using each object are executed. It is possible to effectively use each object image. For example, even if the object A is displayed, the advantage of the game situation given to the player depending on the combination with other objects or whether or not the object A is displayed in the same period as the other objects Since the recognition about the disadvantage differs, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and it is possible to effectively use each object image. In addition, since the probability of winning a jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed is different for each of various display patterns formed of a combination of each object image, the player's attention to the effect configured by each display pattern, The degree of interest and expectation can be improved.

  Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, big hit, off (reach), off (no reach)). By setting the placement position, it is possible to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game by adjusting the placement position. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, according to the situation of the game, since the display pattern which changed the timing which starts the display of each object is set, by adjusting the timing of the display start of each object It is possible to give the player various recognitions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

G1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the suggestion effect is performed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect are performed, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even in the configuration in which the suggestion effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game round in the second game round despite the winning of the jackpot lottery related to the second game round. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to predict that the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game run has been won. In addition, even if it is the configuration that omits the suggestion effect, by performing the game repetition effect due to having won the jackpot lottery pertaining to the second game turn, to give surprise to the player, to the game Unexpectedness can be given.

G2. Modification 2:
In the case a2 of the first embodiment described above and the case c2 of the third embodiment, the suggestive effect is performed in the ending period, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game play, the suggested effect may be executed before the game play effect. That is, if it is the timing before reproducing the presentation already performed, the suggestion presentation can be performed at any timing. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution of the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition effect, so for example, the effect performed in the second game cycle has already been made. It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the executed effect.

G3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game repetition reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the big hit game round. For example, reach effects in out-of-round (reach) game times may be targets for reproduction in special game state reproduction effects and in game repeat effects, or out-of-reach (reach nothing) games It is good also as a target of reproduction of the notice production in times.

G4. Modification 4:
The first gaming times and the second gaming times defined in the first to fourth embodiments are not limited to two gaming times which are successively executed. For example, other game times may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

G5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be performed in the ending period of the special gaming state is determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game number of times executed after the special gaming state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effect to be performed in the ending period of the special gaming state to be executed after the first game is the suggestion effect and the special gaming state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9) The configuration is such that it is determined based on the special information related to the second gaming round to be executed after the special gaming state, but it is not limited to such a configuration. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times to be executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggested effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and adopts any other effect. It is also good. For example, other effects such as normal reach effects (reach effects not targeted for special game state reproduction effects) or effects to be executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to execute an effect in consideration of special information related to a predetermined number of game times to be executed after the special game state in the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect having relevance to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

G6. Modification 6:
The processes performed in the first to fourth embodiments may be used in combination. That is, the case a1 (FIG. 9A) and the case a2 (FIG. 9B), which are the processes to be executed in the first embodiment, and the processes to be executed in the second embodiment (FIGS. 39A and 39B). Case c1 (FIG. 41 (a)) and case c2 (FIG. 41 (b)), which are processes to be executed in the third embodiment, and case d1 (FIG. 42 (a) (and processes to be executed in the fourth embodiment). ) And case d2 (FIG. 42 (b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used in combination. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect of the combined treatment. For example, with regard to effects such as a special game state reproduction effect and a game repetition effect, the attention degree and the expectation degree of the player can be improved with respect to an effect for reproducing an already executed effect.

G7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and the case of winning the jackpot lottery is described as an example, but the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is to be won. It is not limited. For example, as the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the case where the condition for executing the reach effect is satisfied based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 may be adopted. Thus, even if other conditions are set as the predetermined conditions, the same effects as the effects described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

G8. Modification 8:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, three types of images of the objects A to C are adopted as object images used for the preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images may be adopted as object images used for the preview effect, or four types of object images may be adopted. As described above, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted for the contents of each object.

G9. Modification 9:
In the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment, depending on the combination of the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect, the expectation of the jackpot is shown to the player as a game situation, but, for example, the expectation of the probability change jackpot A configuration may be adopted in which the player is shown various game situations as the game situation, such as the degree or the expectation of the current game state being a definite change state.

G10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in an example in FIG. 47, the display pattern tables of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C have three types of jackpot, reach (reach) and out (reach no). In the case where each display pattern random number is distributed, for example, the division of the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further classified into 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot, The effect by the object B may be functioned as a step-up effect indicating the expectation of the probability variation jackpot. In addition, for example, in the gaming machine in which the latent probability change state exists, the effect by the object C may be functioned as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability change state of the current game time. As described above, if the object A, the object B, and the object C have a function that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has different types (for example, jackpot expectations and The degree of pros and cons of the game may be shown.

G11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, although the coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 48 are set as fixed coordinates, the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object is set to change with time. It may be That is, a dynamic trajectory of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having relevance, and each object displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a is The arrangement of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table and the timing of the display start are set so as not to overlap each other.

G12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed so as not to display the image frame. However, the display pattern (A1) is used. The image frame displayed as -A2-A3) may be configured not to display the image frame of a part or all of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3. Further, the same processing may be performed on other object images.

G13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the arrangement and the display start timing for each combination of object images displayed as the advance notice effect by the arrangement and timing setting table. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, even in the notice effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, a notice effect in which (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) are combined, or (A1-A2-A3) and (B1) in combination There are multiple types of preview effects such as the preview effect. The arrangement of each object image and the display start timing may be set for each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects. By doing this, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression.

G14. Modification 14:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, when two or more objects are displayed in one preview effect, the relative positions between the objects are considered, and the objects are related to each other. In order to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a mode having the above, the relative arrangement position between the objects and the timing of the display are set. Specifically, the aspect is set to be displayed in the aspect having narrative as the aspect having relevance, but is set so that the plurality of objects are displayed in the aspect having one idea as the aspect having relevance Various modes can be adopted as a mode in which a plurality of objects have relevance, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule, or a configuration in which a plurality of objects are displayed.

G15. Modification 15:
Each display pattern set in the display pattern table described in the fifth embodiment and the sixth embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in the above embodiment, and adopts the display pattern of the other mode. Can. For example, a display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the display pattern table for BC. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing how a dog comes out of the box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the deterioration of the weather It is possible to give the player the recognition that the situation is disadvantageous, and by combining the objects, it is possible to perform various effects, and objects can be used effectively.

G16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image obtained by combining them is adopted as the image used for the preview effect, but another image may be adopted.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory view showing an object D that can be used for the advance notice effect. The object D is composed of three images of an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and is an image that changes with time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. FIG. 72 (a) shows the image D1, FIG. 72 (b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 72 (c) shows the image D3. As illustrated, the object D expresses a love pattern of a male character and a female character. Specifically, a state in which a male character and a female character are staring each other at a certain distance is represented in the image D1. In the image D2, a state in which a male character and a female character are staring at a short distance is represented. In the image D3, a male character and a female character hold hands and express how they get along well. Further, in the image D 3, it is expressed that the female character is talking to the male character so as to keep the father of the female character secretly making friends.

  In the object D composed of such an image of the contents, a state is shown in which love of men and women is fulfilled as the image progresses in the order of the image D1, the image D2 and the image D3. The image D3 generally gives a better impression than the image D2. That is, the image D2 from the image D1 and the image D3 from the image D2 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image which is set such that the probability of winning a big hit lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine in the modification 16 is provided with the display pattern table for D as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, miss (reach) and miss (reach not), the non-display and display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns of (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are allocated. The display pattern table for D is the display pattern display pattern (D1) among the above four display patterns most frequently displayed in the case of detachment (no reach), and the above is the case in the case of detachment (reach). Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) of the four display patterns is most often displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned to be high.

  The pachinko machine according to the present modification further performs preview effects in which the object E is combined with the image E as another image.

  FIG. 73 shows an image (object D + image E) in which the image E is combined with the object D. As illustrated, an image E, which is an image combined with the object D, represents the father of a female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], and [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D] It is an image which changes with time in order of D3 + image E]. FIG. 73 (a) shows [image D1 + image E], FIG. 72 (b) shows [image D2 + image E], and FIG. 72 (c) shows [image D3 + image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D + image E shows a manner in which the love pattern of the male character and the female character is seen by the father of the female character from behind the pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1 + Image E], it is expressed that a male character and a female character look at each other at a certain distance while watching the father of the female character from behind the pillar It is done. [Image D 2 + Image E] shows that a male character and a female character look at each other at a short distance, while a father of the female character looks from behind the pillar. [Image D3 + Image E] talk so that male characters and female characters connect their hands and female characters keep secret that they are getting along well with their male characters. It is expressed that the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar.

  The object D + image E composed of images of such contents is composed of the female character and the father as the image proceeds in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is speculated that the parent-child relationship will deteriorate. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], a generally negative impression is given. In other words, [image D2 + image E] gives a better impression than [image D3 + image E] and [image D1 + image E] gives a generally better impression than [image D2 + image E]. That is, [image D2 + image E] from [image D3 + image E] and [image D1 + image E] from [image D2 + image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  In addition, the object D + image E is displayed as an effect image which is set so that the probability of winning a jackpot lottery decreases as it progresses to [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine in the modification 16 includes the display pattern table for DE as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of the jackpot, the detachment (reach presence) and the detachment (reach nothing), the non-display and display pattern respectively Four display patterns of (D1 / E), display pattern (D1-D2 / E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) are allocated. When the display pattern table for DE is out (reach nothing), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and it is out (reach existence) In the case where the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is most frequently displayed among the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1 / E) is the most frequently displayed among the four display patterns in the case of the big hit. The value of the display pattern random number counter C22 is assigned from 0 to 99 so as to increase the frequency of occurrence.

  By doing this, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the sixth embodiment. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modification, the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, as compared with the case where the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E in the case where the image D1 is displayed in combination with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a despite the fact that the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. It is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the game situation by devising how to combine the images and the contents of the images.

  In addition, the probability that the jackpot lottery is won is larger when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E than when the image D1 is displayed without being combined with the image E. Although the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E despite the fact that the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E, the big hit lottery is more The probability of being won is high. Therefore, when the predetermined image is combined with the effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery and the degree of expectation are higher, giving the player a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on the presence or absence of the display of the image E. Therefore, the player's attention to the image displayed on the display surface 41a can be improved. Although the above-mentioned effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, the above-described effect can be exerted also between the image D1 and the image D2 and between the image D2 and the image D3.

G17. Modification 17:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when game balls enter a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot by generating rights and a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, and a ball.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

H. About the invention group extracted from each above-mentioned embodiment etc .:
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The feature group A is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature A1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means (the MPU 62, the MPU 92 and the MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments)
In the case where the special information related to the second game run to be executed later than the first game run satisfies the predetermined condition,
At the second game time, reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game time (the process of the case a 2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment) The process of c2, the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment is executed)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A1, at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round despite the case where the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second gaming cycle satisfies the predetermined condition. Then, the game is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only after the notification means reports the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming time. Can be given a surprise. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1, further comprising:
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state in which the player is given a bonus after the game cycle pertaining to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
In the first case where the special information relating to the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round after the start of the special gaming state executed after the first gaming round and before the start of the second gaming round (The process of case a1 in the first embodiment, the process of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
In the second case, the special information relating to the first gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition, and the special information relating to the second gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition,
At the second game time, reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game time (the process of the case a 2 in the first embodiment, the process in the second embodiment, the case in the third embodiment) execute c2 processing)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A2, when the special information relating to the second gaming round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of reproduction of the staging performed in the first gaming round has already been performed. It functions as a role to reproduce, and the player recognizes as such. On the other hand, when the special information relating to the second game play satisfies the predetermined condition, at least a part of reproduction of the effect performed in the first game play is reproduction of the effect already performed in the effect In practice, it is executed because the special information related to the second game time meets the predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game, when the notification means is notified that the special information related to the second game meets the predetermined condition, it is the second time that the second time. Reproduction performed in the game times does not merely reproduce at least a part of the effects performed in the first game times, but is caused by the special information related to the second game times satisfying the predetermined conditions The player recognizes that the game is to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game and to give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the effect already executed.

[Feature A3]
A game machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game, it is suggested that the effect already reproduced be reproduced prior to the reproduction (the first embodiment) A game machine characterized by performing the suggestion effect to be executed in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A3, since the suggested effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game cycle, the effect executed in the second game cycle is the first game It is possible to make the player strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game. After that, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only after notifying the determination result of the special information related to the second gaming time by the notifying means. Further, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to the feature A3,
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time,
In the other game time, execute the suggestion effect (in the second embodiment, perform the suggestion effect in the preceding game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A4, even when there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, by performing the suggestion effect in the other game times, suggestive effect And the reproduction can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature A5]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game run prior to the first game play, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game play (Including the process of case c1 in the third embodiment and the process of case c2).
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature A5, even when continuous effects are executed over the first game period to the first game period before the first game period, the continuous effects can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player,
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach effect performed after the suggested effect is the effect of the effect performed in the first game time on the effect Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, it is actually executed due to the special information related to the second game meeting satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of fulfilling a predetermined condition, and at least at least the effects executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a partial reproduction and in the effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, but in fact, the special information related to the game time is predetermined At least three cases can be set up, with the case being performed due to meeting the conditions. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
A game cycle (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game cycle (a first game cycle in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by determining the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time based on the special information related to the second game time).

  According to the feature B1, since the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined based on the special information related to the game time to be executed after the specific game time, it is special to the reproduction While being able to give a meaning, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the reproduction, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The effect executing means is
The determination means determines whether or not the special information relating to the game times to be executed after the specific game times which is the game times when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means (step S1021) As well as
Based on the result of the determination performed before the determination means, the timing to reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game number is determined (the processing of steps S2102 to S2112 is performed)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B2, by performing determination of whether or not the special information relating to the game times to be executed after the specific game times satisfies the predetermined condition before the determination means, the effect of the effect executed in the specific game times An effect in the game times to be executed before the game times determined to reproduce at least a part can be determined in consideration of the game times to execute the reproduction. Therefore, it is possible to execute, for example, an effect having relevance to the reproduction as an effect in the game time to be executed before the game time determined to execute the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
A game machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein
The effect executing means is
Among the game times executed after the specific game times, the game times where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 of the first embodiment, second in the case c2 of the second embodiment and the third embodiment) It is determined to reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time in the game time).

  According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time is reproduced. It is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the game play to be played satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the notification means notifies the result of the determination of the special information related to the gaming time, the player is given the unexpectedness by making the player recognize that the special information related to the gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition. be able to. That is, by making the game run unexplored development of the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein
The effect executing means is
Before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, a suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed.

  According to the feature B4, the suggestion effect suggesting to reproduce the effect already executed is executed. Therefore, the degree of attention and interest of the player with respect to the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game It can be improved. In addition, when reproduction of at least a part of the effects performed in the specific game times is executed in the game times in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the game times in which the reproduction is further executed by executing the suggested effect It is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the above satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to the feature B4,
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the specific game times and a game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game times,
In the other game time, execute the suggestion effect (in the second embodiment, perform the suggestion effect in the preceding game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B5, even if there are other game times between the specific game times and the game times for reproducing at least a part of the effects executed in the specific game times, the suggestion is made in the other game times By performing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the effect performed in the suggested effect and the specific game play without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

[Feature B6]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein
In the case where the effect executing means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game play,
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means is the effect executed in the specific game time, and includes reach effect which is an effect suggesting to the player the expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature B6, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game run, is actually executed based on the special information related to the game run according to the effect By making the player recognize the game, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. In addition, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game cycle. In the case of being executed as a reproduction and in the effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the specific game time, but in fact, the special information related to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set with the case where it is executed due to the cause. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature C1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a bonus to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
When the special gaming state is executed, an effect to be executed in the special gaming state is determined based on the special information related to a predetermined number of gaming times executed after the special gaming state (first embodiment) In case a1 and case a2 in the second embodiment, and in the case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, effects in the special gaming state after the first game round by the success or failure of the jackpot lottery in the second game round To determine / S1201 to S1209, S2401 to S2409)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C1, in the special game state, an effect taking into consideration special information related to a predetermined number of game times to be executed after the special game state can be executed. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect having relevance to the effect to be executed in the predetermined game time, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The effect executing means is
When the special gaming state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is executed in the special gaming state. (In case a1 in the first embodiment and case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special gaming state after the first game cycle),
In the case where the special gaming state is executed, and the special information relating to the predetermined gaming time is the second satisfying the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is performed in the predetermined gaming time Execute (in case a2 in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, and in the case c2 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the second game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C2, when the special information relating to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the special effect relating to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition which is executed in the special gaming state In this case, the player can be made to recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed has a special meaning by executing the predetermined game play. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C3]
A game machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of an effect executed in a game run executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C3, although the special information related to the predetermined gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, at least the effects executed in the gaming time executed prior to the special gaming state in the predetermined gaming time Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the predetermined game play satisfies the predetermined condition. Only when the notification means determines that the result of the determination of the special information pertaining to the predetermined game play has been notified to the player is that the player is made to recognize that the special information pertaining to the predetermined game play satisfies the predetermined condition. It can be granted. That is, by making the predetermined number of times of the game unfolded by the player, surprise can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to the feature C3,
In the case where the game times to be executed before the special game state is defined as a first game time, and the predetermined game times to be executed after the special game state is defined as a second game time,
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes the effect executed by the effect executing means in the first game time when the special information relating to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction (reproduction) The target effect is the first by winning the jackpot lottery relating to the first game time in the case a1 and the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c1 and the case c2 of the third embodiment. Including the effects performed in the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C4, when the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, only when the notification means reports that the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the staging performed in the first gaming round However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second gaming cycle has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, and to impart unexpectedness to the game. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for reproduction.

[Feature C5]
A game machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature C5, when the special information related to the predetermined gaming time (the second gaming time) satisfies the predetermined condition, in the gaming time (the first gaming time) to be executed before the special gaming state The achieved reach effect is reproduced in the second game play. Therefore, in the second game play, the reach effect that has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the game play performed prior to the special game state in terms of the play is actually the second Unexpectedness can be given to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the game time has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition. Also, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an intrinsic function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and a game run executed before the special gaming state. When it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in, and in terms of the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game run executed before the special gaming state, Can be set to at least three cases where it is executed due to the special information related to the game time fulfilling the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature C6]
A game machine according to any one of features C2 to C5, wherein
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized by performing a suggested effect which suggests performing the predetermined effect before the predetermined effect is performed.

  According to the feature C6, the player's attention to the predetermined effect to be executed by executing the suggestion effect which suggests to execute the predetermined effect before the predetermined effect is performed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Feature C7]
A gaming machine according to feature C6,
The effect executing means is
The special gaming state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined number of game times fulfills the predetermined condition.
If there is another game play between the special game state and the predetermined game play,
While performing the said suggestion effect in the said other game times (In the second embodiment, while performing the suggestion effect in the preceding game time),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game repetition effect is performed in the second game time)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature C7, even if there are other game times between the special game state and the predetermined game time, by performing the suggested effect in the other game times, the suggested effect and the predetermined The effect can be executed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

[Feature C8]
A game machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein
An object reproduced by the effect executing means is at least a part of effects executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the feature C8, even when continuous rendition is executed over at least two consecutive game rounds executed before the special gaming state, the continuous rendition may be reproduced it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature D1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Special game state start means for starting a special game state for giving a bonus to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The special game state starting means is
Triggered by the fact that the special information pertaining to the second gaming cycle to be executed after the first gaming season meets the predetermined condition, the second special gaming state is started,
The effect executing means is
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information according to the first game time (in the first embodiment, the effect to be executed in the special game state is the first of the cases a1 By the relationship between the game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the first game time in the case a1 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] to be executed before the game time of To determine the effect to be executed in the special gaming state after the first game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] [S2401, S2402, S2403 to S2405] / first game time of the case a2 The second game time [the feature group] by the relationship between [corresponding to the first game pattern in the feature group] and the second game pattern in case a2 [corresponding to the second game pattern in the feature group] 2 play Determining the effect to be executed in the special game state after Action] in time [S2401, S2407])
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D1, the second special is executed after the second game in consideration of the special information of the first game performed before the second game in which the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. An effect in the gaming state can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to give relevancy between the special information relating to the first gaming round and the effects in the second special gaming state, and various effects from the first gaming round to the second special gaming state Can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to the feature D1,
In the case where the second special gaming state is executed by the special information related to the second gaming time fulfilling the predetermined condition,
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first gaming occasion satisfies the predetermined condition (when the first gaming occasion and the second gaming occasion in the case a2 of the first embodiment have a relationship),
Of the effects performed in the first gaming cycle (first gaming cycle of case a2 of the first embodiment) in the second gaming cycle (second gaming cycle of the case a2 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part (perform the processing of S2108 and S2109),
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (a game time and a first game time to be executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment In the case of
In the second special gaming state (the special gaming state after the first gaming round of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second gaming round (the first gaming round of the case a1 of the first embodiment) Reproduce at least a part of the executed effect (perform the process of S2405)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effects executed in the first game round is reproduced in the second game round, even though the special information relating to the second game round satisfies the predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second game play satisfies the predetermined condition. It is surprising to the game that the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming time is notified by the notification means. Can be given. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the special information related to the first gaming round does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effects executed in the second gaming round is reproduced in the second special gaming state, so the second It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to view again the effect performed when the special information relating to the game play of the game satisfies the predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to the feature D2,
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (in the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment, In the case of a relationship), before performing the reproduction, execute the first suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect already performed (perform the process of S2406),
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effects executed in the second game time in the second special game state (a game time being executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment If it becomes a relationship between the game and the first game time), before performing the reproduction, execute the second suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect already performed (execute the processing of S2405 )
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D3, the first suggestion effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect performed in the second game time is reproduced Since the second suggestion effect is executed before the play, at least a partial reproduction of the effect performed in the first game time or at least a partial reproduction of the effect performed in the second game time, The degree of attention of the player can be improved.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3, wherein
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (in the first game time and the second game time in the case a2 of the first embodiment, When it comes to relationships),
In the first special gaming state where special information relating to the first gaming occasion is started by satisfying the predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect is suggested that suggests reproducing the effect already executed (S2406 Execute the process)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D4, by executing an effect suggesting the contents of the effect in the game times after the first special game state in the first special game state, the game time after the first special game state is ended The degree of attention, the degree of interest and the expectation of the player can be improved.

[Feature D5]
A game machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature D5, the reach effect which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is actually caused by the special information related to the second game cycle. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed, it is possible to impart a surprisingness to the game. In addition, when at least a part of the effects executed in the second game play is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game play is executed in the second special game state, so the second play It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the reach effect in the game play again. Furthermore, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of reproduction of the effect already executed. When it is executed, although it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect, actually, it is executed because the special information related to the game time meets a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect execution unit that executes an effect in each of the game times;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second game time that is executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (In the case of the case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
It has already been executed after the execution of the effect in the first gaming time and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first gaming time in the second gaming time A game machine characterized by executing a suggested effect that suggests that the effect is reproduced.

  According to the feature E1, even though the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first gaming time the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second gaming time Since at least a part of the rendition performed at step S.7 is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to predict that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. In addition, by executing the suggested effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game session, at least in the second game session, at least the effect executed in the first game session The player can be further given the recognition that only a part is reproduced. And, only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the second gaming round is notified by the notification means, the player is made to recognize that the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, Can be given a surprise. That is, by making the second game play an expansion unanticipated by the player, it is possible to give a surprise to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
The effect executing means is
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
After the execution of the effect in the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time, a suggestion effect is suggested that suggests that the effect already performed is reproduced. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E2, even when the special information relating to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second game time may not Since at least a part of the effects performed in one game run is reproduced, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the special information related to the game run for which reproduction is performed does not necessarily satisfy the predetermined conditions. . As a result, when at least a part of the effects executed in the first game round is reproduced, the player is given a feeling of expectation and a sense of expectation to the player and the player of the game round in which the reproduction is executed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
A game machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
When the special information related to the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the special information related to the second gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) To
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round in the second gaming round,
The gaming machine, wherein the suggestion effect is executed after the start of a special gaming state to be executed after the first gaming round and before the reproduction in the second gaming round.

  According to the feature E3, when the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information relating to the first game time is executed in the first game time by satisfying the predetermined condition The effect is reproduced in the second game round. Therefore, it is not until the notification means that the special information related to the second gaming time meets the predetermined condition is notified by the notification means, the effect is performed as a reproduction of the effect performed in the first gaming time However, in reality, by causing the player to recognize that the special information pertaining to the second gaming cycle has been executed due to the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's degree of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reproduction of the effect. Furthermore, when the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first gaming round is executed due to the special information related to the second gaming round fulfilling the predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player Since the special gaming state of giving an is started, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for reproduction of the effect.

[Feature E4]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3;
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player,
A game machine characterized in that the target that the effect executing means reproduces includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player an expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature E4, when the special information related to the second gaming round satisfies the predetermined condition, the reach effect executed in the first gaming round is reproduced in the second gaming round. Therefore, the reach effect being executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game run is actually that the special information related to the second game run satisfies the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the game has been executed due to the game, it is possible to give a surprisingness to the game. In addition, when reach effect is executed, it is executed as an inherent function of suggesting to the player an expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game cycle. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of a part and in terms of effect, it is performed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect performed in the first game cycle, but in fact, the special information pertaining to the game cycle has a predetermined condition At least three cases can be set up, which are performed due to the fulfillment. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's level of attention, degree of interest, and expectation for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestion effect in the other game session.

  According to the feature E5, even when there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time, by performing the suggestion effect in the other game times, suggestive effect and The reproduction can be performed without giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

[Feature E6]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game run prior to the first game play, and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game play A gaming machine characterized by including:

  According to the feature E6, even when continuous effects are executed over the first game period to the first game period before the first game period, the continuous effects can be reproduced .

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature group A, feature group B, feature group C, feature group D, and feature group E solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed in accordance with various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include, for example, reach effects executed with low probability and effects executed with low frequency such as effects executed only when the jackpot lottery is won. Such a low frequency of rendition may be desired to be reproduced for the purpose of appreciation after being performed once. Conventionally, in order to respond to such a demand of a player, a gaming machine has been known which executes an effect that reproduces an effect that has been performed once.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , And the like in the image display means (object A, object B, object C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a mode having relevance to the second image (at S2805 in the fifth embodiment) Set and display each object to be displayed in a related manner by referring to the arrangement / timing table / Display in a manner in which each object is related in S2905 of the sixth embodiment Each object based on each display pattern table set to
A game machine characterized by

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect.

  According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed in a mode having relevance to the second image. The effect performed by being displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the two images can improve the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image, a plurality of different images may be generated using the first image. Aspect presentation can be performed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
The gaming machine characterized in that the aspect having the relevancy includes the aspect in which the first image and the second image have a narrative in relation to each other.

  According to the feature F2, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a related manner in a narrative manner Therefore, the effect to be performed by being displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) of the first image and the second image can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having a narrative effect that is executed by being displayed in a period in which the first image and the second image overlap.

[Feature F3]
A game machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein
The degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is:
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment S2803 / S6905 in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature F3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, and is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. As suggested, the first image can be used to perform a plurality of different aspects of rendering, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3;
The first image and the second image suggest the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the different types of the game (processing of S2803 in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature F4, an image can be used to indicate the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature F5]
A game machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature F5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature F6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature G1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An expectation image storage means for storing an expectation image which is an image which changes over time;
An image display means for displaying the expectation image as the effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The expected degree image storage means is
With the first expectation image,
With the second expectation image
Remember
The control means
Displaying the first expectation image on the image display means;
Displaying the second expectation image on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first expectation degree image, and at least a part of the time axis direction of the second expectation degree image Displaying, on the image display means, a third expectation image, which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image from which the image to be extracted with the second partial image in a manner having relevance;
There is
A probability that the special information when the first expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first probability.
A probability that the special information when the second expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a second probability.
In the case where the probability that the special information when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a third probability.
The control means is configured such that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability.
The first expectation image, the second expectation image or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means (displayed using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment Display using display pattern table in
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G1, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have relevance as the expectation image to be displayed on the image display means. Since the third expectation image combined in the aspect is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation image and the second expectation image. Since the third expectation image is an expectation image obtained by combining the first partial image and the second partial image in a manner having relevance, the third expectation image does not give the player a complicated impression, and It can improve the quality. Also, the first expectation image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image may be displayed as image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. Thus, the player's attention to the expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The third probability is different for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, a plurality of different displays can be obtained by extracting images of different periods with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image. As it is possible to display the third expectation image on the image display means in an aspect, various effects can be performed using the third expectation image. Also, since the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, the player's attention to the third expectation image can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is
The plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image are set in advance (the arrangement position of each object is set in advance for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are a plurality of different ones of the third expectation image. Since the display mode is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superimposed on the image display means as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.
The control means
When extracting the first partial image from the first expectation image, the image of a different period is extracted with respect to the time axis direction of the first expectation image, whereby the plurality of different display modes are performed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means;
The relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from the plurality of the third expectation image. The display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern according to the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature G4, the timing of relative display of the first partial image and the second partial image to be displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is a plurality of different ones of the third expectation image Since the display mode is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed on the image display means at timings unrelated to each other as the third expectation image. Therefore, each effect in which the third expectation image is used in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature H1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , On the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, an arrangement position at which a relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined (arrangement position in the fifth embodiment A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position determined in the timing table / arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect.

  According to the feature H1, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, an arrangement position at which the relative position with the second image is predetermined. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) improves the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. Can. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image, a plurality of different images may be generated using the first image. Aspect presentation can be performed, and the first image can be used effectively.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1,
The control means
The first image is displayed on the image display means in a period overlapping with the second image in a plurality of different display modes.
An arrangement position (a display / pattern table according to the sixth embodiment) in which a relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined according to each of the plurality of different display modes. It is displayed on the image display means at the set arrangement position).

  According to the feature H2, since the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image in a plurality of different display modes, various operations using the first image and the second image are performed. A presentation can be performed. Further, according to each of the different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at an arrangement position where the relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined. , The first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the various effects performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) do not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect is improved. It can be done.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or the feature H2, wherein
When the control means displays the first image in a period overlapping with the second image, a timing relatively predetermined with the second image (in the fifth embodiment) It is displayed on the said image display means at the timing of the display determined in the arrangement | positioning * timing table / the display timing set in the display pattern table in 6th Embodiment. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature H3, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at unrelated timings at all. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3;
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when not displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment Display pattern table in the third embodiment (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature H4, when the first image is displayed in the overlapping period with the second image, and when it is displayed in the period not overlapping the second image, the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game is different As suggested, the first image can be used to perform effects in a plurality of different aspects with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved. And, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the relative position with the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so A high effect can be provided to the player.

[Feature H5]
A game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein
The first image and the second image suggest the advantages and disadvantages of different types of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature H5, in each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image, it suggests the degree of advantage and disadvantage of different types of games can do. Therefore, the combination of the plurality of images can indicate the degree of advantage and disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature H6, the effect formed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature H7, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature I1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player and is different from the first image , On the image display means,
The first image may be displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, or may be displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image,
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the timing relatively predetermined with the second image (arrangement and timing table in the fifth embodiment) A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the determined display timing / the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  There is a gaming machine which displays an image on an image display means and performs an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such images are prepared, and each image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, depending on the state of the game, the conditions under which a plurality of images are displayed may overlap, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) A plurality of images are displayed according to each setting, without considering. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without relation at all, or several images may be displayed superimposed on one another, giving the player the impression that it is a complicated effect. Note that the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game indicates the degree to which the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the state of game play is advantageous to the player, such as the expectation for winning a jackpot lottery, the expectation for a probability change jackpot, the expectation for a game turn to be a probability change state, etc. Indicates the degree to which there is a disadvantage.

  According to the feature I1, when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The first image and the second image are never displayed at unrelated timings. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give a complicated impression to the player, and further improves the quality of the effect. Can. In addition, since the first image may be displayed in a period overlapping the second image (same period) or may be displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the first image is used. It is possible to execute effects in a plurality of different modes, and to make effective use of the first image.

[Feature I2]
It is a game machine according to feature I1,
The control means is configured to arrange the first image relative to the second image at a predetermined arrangement position (arrangement position determined by arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the feature I2, when the first image is displayed in a period (the same period) overlapping the second image, an arrangement position at which the relative position with the second image is predetermined. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are never superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) improves the quality of the effect without giving the player a complicated impression. Can.

[Feature I3]
A game machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein
The degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image is:
The first image and the second image when displayed in the overlapping period of the first image and the second image is different from the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game suggested (fifth embodiment Display pattern table in the third embodiment (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I3, the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, and is displayed in a period not overlapping with the second image. As suggested, the first image can be used to perform effects in a plurality of different aspects with different degrees of advantage / disadvantage of the game, and the first image can be used effectively. In addition, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage differs depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) with other images, so the player's attention to the effect , The degree of interest and the sense of expectation can be improved. And, even when displaying an image combined with the second image, the relative position with the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so A high effect can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein
The first image and the second image suggest the advantages and disadvantages of different types of the game (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I4, in each of the effect consisting of the first image, the effect consisting of the second image, and the effect consisting of the first image and the second image, it suggests the degree of advantage and disadvantage of different types of games can do. Therefore, the combination of the plurality of images can indicate the degree of advantage and disadvantage of various types of games.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein
The control means
When the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image, the image display unit is provided with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display
In the case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means without the image frame.

  According to the feature I5, the effect formed of the first image and the second image can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes with time. A game machine.

  According to the feature I6, various effects can be performed by using an image that changes with time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, variations, or a combination thereof.
[Feature J1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An image storage means for storing an image which makes it possible to give the player a recognition of advantages and disadvantages about the game situation;
Image display means for displaying the image as an effect;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The control means
The first image stored in the image storage means is displayed on the image display means for enabling the player to be given recognition of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation.
A combined image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, which is a recognition of the advantage / disadvantage of the game situation and is not combined with the second image. A combined image that enables the player to be given a recognition different from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments) The display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing how a dog comes out of a box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a table showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to the deterioration of the weather. A pattern, gives the recognition that the status of the game is disadvantageous to the player / modification 15)
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature J1, when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, the recognition of giving the player the advantage and disadvantage of the game, and the first image as the second image Since it is possible to change the recognition given to the player about the advantage or disadvantage of the game when combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image, The image of can be used effectively. The game status is based on the game status, for example, whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, or whether the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. I say the situation.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to the feature J1,
When the control means displays the first image in combination with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is determined according to the situation of the game Setting (setting to the arrangement position determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / setting to the arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) and displaying on the image display means A game machine that features it.

  According to the feature J2, since the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are displayed. Can be used to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J3]
A game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein
The relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image when the first image is displayed in combination with the second image. Are set according to the game situation (set to the display timing determined in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

  According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means. The image and the second image can be used to give the player various perceptions of the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3.
A game machine characterized in that at least one of the first image or the second image is an image which changes with time.

  According to the feature J4, various effects can be performed by using an image that is an image that changes with time.

<Feature K group>
The feature K groups are extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature K1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
An image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image rather than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is not combined with the third image by the control means and displayed on the image display means About the game situation for the player in the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image Despite giving an advantageous recognition,
The control means combines the first image (the box image of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to produce the image display means The second image (the image where the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by giving the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation than when displayed on the image display means in combination with the above.

  According to the feature K1, the case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image is better for the player than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Even though the first image is displayed in combination with the third image in spite of the advantageous recognition of the game situation, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. Give the player an advantageous recognition of the gaming situation. Therefore, it is possible to execute various effects depending on how to combine the images. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on the presence or absence of the display of the third image. Accordingly, the player's attention to the image displayed on the image display means can be improved.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first temporal change image (an object C temporally changing in order of an image C1, an image C2 and an image C3) which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image, a portion from the first time-lapse image By extracting the image and combining it with the third image, more various effects can be performed.

[Feature K3]
A game machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, wherein
The control means
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the feature K3, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case in which the second image is not displayed and the case in which the second image is not displayed is thereafter displayed. Because of this, it is possible to perform versatile rendering using the first image and the second image.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1 in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the advance notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the advance effect by the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature K4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed after that (the first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (in the second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Thus, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then the state is the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, various effects can be performed by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics.

[Feature K5]
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B temporally changing in order of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) which is an image that changes over time,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image.

  According to the feature K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image, various effects are produced using the second time-lapse image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-lapse image are combined and displayed, the third image which is a part of the second time-lapse image is the first image or the second image. If displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the player's recognition of the game situation.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof.
[Feature L1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for notifying the result of determination by the determination means as to whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
Image storage means for storing at least a first image, a second image and a third image;
An image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means;
Control means for controlling the image display means;
A gaming machine comprising
The second image rather than the case where the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is not combined with the third image by the control means and displayed on the image display means In the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image, the special information is the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting
The control means combines the first image (the box image of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the rain image of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to produce the image display means The second image (the image where the dog makes a face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed in the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than the case where the special information is displayed on the image display means in combination with the above.

  According to the feature L1, the special information is more predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. When the first image is displayed in combination with the third image in spite of the high probability of satisfying the condition, the second image is displayed in combination with the third image, There is a high probability that the special information meets the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first temporal change image (an object C temporally changing in order of an image C1, an image C2 and an image C3) which is an image that changes with time,
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature L2, since the first image and the second image are partial images constituting at least a part of the time axis direction of the first time-lapse image, the first time-lapse image is displayed In this case, the player's attention to the presence or absence of the display of the third image can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, wherein
The control means
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image after the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case in which the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed and the case where the image is not displayed thereafter Because of this, it is possible to perform versatile rendering using the first image and the second image.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to the feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1 in the display pattern table for C in the sixth embodiment) The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the advance notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the advance effect by the
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature L4, when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then, when the second image is not displayed with the third image (the first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (in the second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Thus, in the first case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, then the state is the second case where the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image. The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, various effects can be performed by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (an object B temporally changing in order of an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3) which is an image that changes over time,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image.

  According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time axis direction of the second time-lapse image, various effects are produced using the second time-lapse image. Can be performed. For example, when the first image and the second image and the second time-lapse image are combined and displayed, the third image which is a part of the second time-lapse image is the first image or the second image. If displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the player's recognition of the game situation.

  The invention of the above-mentioned feature F group, feature G group, feature H group, feature I group, feature J group, feature K group, and feature L group solves the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various effects are performed in accordance with various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine which displays an object image on an image display means and executes an effect indicating the degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image indicates the degree of advantage and disadvantage of the game.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, you may apply the structure which combined suitably 1 or several structure contained in the said feature A group to the feature L group. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

Pachinko game machine: Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area based on the player's shooting operation, and starting ball entry provided in the game area and capable of entering the game balls flowing down the game area An information acquisition unit for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball storage unit;
A game machine comprising: acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting ball storage portion.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective forms described in the section of the summary of the invention, and the technical features in the modified examples are for solving some or all of the problems described above, or Replacements or combinations can be made as appropriate to achieve part or all of the effects. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in the present specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine main body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window portion 19: Glass unit 20: Upper plate 21: Lower plate 22: Discharge port 23: Lever 24: Directional operation button 25: Operation handle 30: Game board 31 ... induction rail 31a ... inner rail section 31b ... outer rail section 32 ... general winning opening 33 ... first starting port 34 ... second starting port 34a ... electric Character 34b ... Motorized role drive 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... 1st result display section 37b ... 2nd result display section 37c ... 1st suspension display section 37d ... 2nd suspension display section 38 ... popular drawing unit 39 ... round Display 40: Variable display unit 41: Symbol display 41a ... display surface 41 aL ... display area 41 aS ... display area 42 ... nail 43 ... out port 45 ... main display section 46 ... speaker 47 ... various lamps 51 .. . 1st control unit 52 2nd control unit 53 3rd control unit 54 tank 55 tank rail 56 case rail 60 main controller 61 main Control board 62: Main side MPU
63: Main side ROM
64: Main RAM
63a: success / failure table storage area 63b: distribution table storage area 63c ... reach determination table storage area 63d ... fluctuation time table storage area 63e ... stop result table storage area 63f ... command Information storage area 64a ... Lottery counter buffer 64b ... Pending information storage area 64c ... Electric power holding area 64d ... Various counter areas 64e ... Various flag storage areas 64f ... First judgment processing result Memory area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Dispensing control device 71 ... Dispensing device 80 ... Launching control device 81 ... Game ball firing mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... sound emission control device 91 ... sound emission control board 92 ... sound light side MPU
93: Sound and light side ROM
93a ... effect pattern table storage area 93b ... variation display pattern table storage area 94 ... sound light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103: Program ROM
104 ... work RAM
106: Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
PA: Game area PC: Winning counter area AE: Execution area Ra: First holding area Rb: Second holding area

Claims (5)

An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A determination unit that determines whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition;
Notification means for sequentially notifying the result of the determination by the determination means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, for each game cycle;
An effect executing means for executing an effect;
A gaming machine comprising
The effect executing means is
In the case where the special information related to the second game run to be executed later than the first game run satisfies the predetermined condition,
A game machine characterized by reproducing at least a part of an effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:
The game machine further comprises special game state start means for starting a special game state in which the player is given a bonus after the game cycle pertaining to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
In the first case where the special information relating to the first gaming time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information relating to the second gaming time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
Reproduce at least a part of the effects executed in the first gaming round after the start of the special gaming state executed after the first gaming round and before the start of the second gaming round ,
In the second case, the special information relating to the first gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition, and the special information relating to the second gaming time fulfills the predetermined condition,
A game machine characterized by reproducing at least a part of an effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein
The effect executing means is
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect performed in the first game, it is preferable to execute a suggested effect that suggests reproducing the effect already performed before the reproduction. A game machine that features it. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein
The effect executing means is
If there are other game times between the first game time and the second game time,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestion effect in the other game session. It is a game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The target to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game run prior to the first game play, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game play A game machine characterized by including a section.